Nokia N90-1 User Manual
Nokia N90-1 User Guide
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION de clare under our sole responsibility that the produ ct RM-42 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declar ation of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/ Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribution or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior writt en permission of No kia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, and Pop- Port are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a sound ma rk of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed from Symbia n Software Ltd é 1998-200(5). Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are tradem arks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é 1996, Stac , Inc., é 1994-1996 Microsoft Co rporation. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î, é 1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Part of the software in this product is é Copyright ANT Ltd. 1998. All rights reserved. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pate nts. T9 text input software Copyright é 1997-2005. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. MPEG-4 This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connect ion with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncomme rcial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional i nformation including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial use s may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of continuous deve lopment. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of th e products described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be res ponsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequential or indirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided âÂÂas isâÂÂ. Except as required by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either exp ress or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or conten ts of this document. Nokia reserves the right to revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior notice The availability of particul ar products may vary by re gion. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you. Export Controls This device may contain commodities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC / INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio inte rference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your tele phone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your local service fa cility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subje ct to the condition that this device does not ca use harmful interference.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contents For your safety .......... ................................. 8 Your Nokia N90 ...................................... 11 Modes ................................... .................................................. 11 Fold open mode .......... .................................................. 11 Fold closed mode ....... .................................................. 12 Imaging mode ............. .................................................. 12 Camera mode .............. .................................................. 13 Essential indicators ............................................................. 13 Attach the wrist st rap ........................................................ 14 Configure settings ............................................................... 14 Nokia support on th e Web ................................................ 14 Help ......................................................................................... 15 Clock ........................................................................................ 15 Clock settings..... ........................................................... 15 World clock. ................. .................................................. 16 Volume and loudspeaker control .................................... 16 File manager .............. ........................................................... 17 View memory consumption ...................................... 17 Memory lowâÂÂfree memory ....................................... 17 Memory card tool..... ........................................................... 18 Format a memory card ............................................... 19 Useful shortcuts ................................................................... 19 Personalise your device ...........................21 ProfilesâÂÂSet tones .............................................................. 22 Offline profile .... ........................................................... 22 Transfer content from another device .......................... 23 Change the look of yo ur device ...................................... 24 Active standby mode .......................................................... 24 Make calls ................. ...............................26 Voice calls .................. ........................................................... 26 Make a conference call.............................................. 27 Speed dial a phone number ...................................... 27 Voice dialling .............. .................................................. 27 Video calls .................. ........................................................... 28 Video sharing ........... ........................................................... 30 Video sharing requirements...................................... 30 Settings ........................ .................................................. 30 Share video .................. .................................................. 31 Accept an invitat ion ................................................... 32
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Answer or reject a call ........................... ............................ 32 Answer or reject a video call .................................... 33 Call waiting ............. ..................................................... 34 Options during a voic e call ....................................... 34 Options during a vide o call ....................................... 34 Log ........................................................................................... 35 Recent calls ............. ..................................................... 35 Call duration ............ ..................................................... 35 Packet data ............... ..................................................... 35 Monitor all communication events ........................ 35 Contacts (Phonebook) .............................37 Save names and numb ers ................................................. 37 Default numbers and addresses .............................. 38 Copy contacts ......... ........................................... ................... 38 SIM directory and other SIM services .................... 39 Add ringing tones for contacts ........................................ 39 Create contact grou ps ....................................................... 39 Remove members from a group .............................. 40 Camera and Gallery ................................. 41 Camera ................................................................................... 41 Take pictures in the Imaging mode ........................ 41 Take pictures in the Camera mode ......................... 46 Edit images ............... ..................................................... 47 Tips on taking good photographs............................ 48 Record videos .......... ..................................................... 49 Edit video clips ............................................................. 51 Gallery .................................................................................... 54 View images and vide o clips .................................... 55 Albums ............................... ............................................. 56 Imaging ........................ ............................. 57 Image print ...................... ..................................................... 57 Printer selection ........................................ ................... 57 Print preview ........... ..................................................... 57 Print settings ........... ..................................................... 58 RealPlayer⢠...................... ..................................................... 58 Play video or sound clips ........................................... 58 Create a track list ........................................................ 59 Stream content over the air ..................................... 59 Receive RealPlayer se ttings ...................................... 59 Movie Director ................ ..................................................... 60 Create a quick muve e................................................. 61 Create a custom mu vee ............................................. 61 Messaging.................... ............................. 63 Write text ......................... ..................................................... 64 Traditional text in put ................................................. 64 Predictive text inputâÂÂDictionary ............................ 65 Copy text to clip board ............................................... 66
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5 Write and send mess ages.................................................. 67 Receive MMS and e-mail settings .......................... 68 InboxâÂÂreceive messages ................................................... 69 Multimedia messages ................................................. 69 Data and settings......................................................... 70 Web service messages ................................................ 70 My folders ................... ........................................................... 70 Mailbox......................................... .......................................... 71 Open the mailbox ........................................................ 71 Retrieve e-mail messages.......................................... 71 Retrieve e-mail messages automatically .............. 72 Delete e-mail messages ............................................. 72 Disconnect from the mailbox ................................... 73 OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent........................... 73 View messages on a SIM card ......................................... 74 Messaging settings .. ........................................................... 74 Text messages .... ........................................................... 74 Multimedia messages ................................................. 75 E-mail .............................................................................. 76 Web service messages ................................................ 78 Cell broadcast .... ........................................................... 78 Other settings .... ........................................................... 78 Calendar ..................... .............................. 79 Create calendar entr ies ...................................................... 79 Set a calendar alarm ................................................... 80 Calendar views .. ........................................... ........................ 80 Remove calendar entries ................................................... 80 Calendar settings ................................................................ 81 Web ............................ ............................... 82 Access the Web......... ........................................................... 82 Receive browser settings ........................................... 82 Enter the settings manually ..................................... 82 Bookmarks view ........ ........................................................... 83 Add bookmarks manually .......................................... 83 Send bookmarks ......... .................................................. 83 Make a connection ............................................................. 83 Connection securi ty .................................................... 84 Browse .................................. .................................................. 84 View saved pages ........................................................ 85 Download and purchase items ........................................ 85 End a connection...... ........................................................... 86 Empty the cache .......................................................... 86 Web settings .............. ........................................................... 86 Office ......................... ...............................88 Calculator .............................................................................. 88 Calculate percentages ................................................ 88 Converter ............................................................................... 88 Set base currency and exchange rates .................. 89
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 6 To-do ....................................................................................... 89 Create a task list .......................................................... 89 Notes ....................................................................................... 90 Recorder ............................ ..................................................... 90 My own ........................ ............................. 91 Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts .......................................................... 91 Delete a shortcut .... ..................................................... 91 IMâÂÂInstant messaging (c hat) ......................................... 91 Receive IM settings ..................................................... 92 Connect to an IM server ............................................ 92 Modify your IM settings ............................................ 92 Search for IM groups and users............................... 93 Join and leave an IM group ...................................... 93 Chat ................................................................................. 93 View and start conversations ................................... 94 IM contacts .............. ..................................................... 95 Manage IM groups ...................................................... 95 Administrate an IM group ......................................... 96 Chat server settin gs .................................................... 96 Connectivity ............ ................................. 98 Bluetooth connection ........................................................ 98 Bluetooth connection settings ................................ 99 Send data using a Bluetooth connection ............. 99 Pair devices...... ........................................................... 100 Receive data using a Bluetooth connection ...... 101 Switch off Bluetooth connectivity ....................... 101 PC connections ............... ................................................... 101 CD-ROM ....................................................................... 102 Your device as a modem ......................................... 102 Connection manager ........................................................ 102 View data connection details ................................ 102 Remote synchronisat ion.................................................. 103 Create a new synchronisation profile.................. 103 Synchronise data .... ................................................... 104 Device manager .............. ................................................... 105 Server profile settings .............................................. 105 Tools ......................... .............................. 106 Settings ................................................................................ 106 Phone settings ............................................................ 106 Call settings ............. ................................................... 107 Connection settings .................................................. 108 Date and time .......... ................................................... 111 Security ............................. ........................................... 111 Call diverting ........... ................................................... 114 Call barring ............. ................................................... 114 Network........................................................................ 115 Enhancement settings ............................................. 115 Cover display settings ...................................................... 116 Voice commands ............ ................................................... 116
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 7 Application manage r ....................................................... 116 Install applications and software ......................... 117 Remove applications and software ..................... 118 Application settings ................................................. 118 Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files . 119 Troubleshooting ........ ............................ 120 Q&A ...................................................................................... 120 Battery information.............................. 123 Charging and discharging .............................................. 123 Nokia battery authentication guidelines ................... 123 Nokia original enhancements .............. 126 Battery .................................. ............................................... 127 Nokia Wireless Boom Headset HS-4W ....................... 127 Nokia Wireless Plug-in Ca r Handsfree HF-6W ........ 128 Nokia Wireless Keyboard SU-8W ................................. 129 Care and maintenance ......................... 130 Additional safety information ............. 131 Index .......................... ............................ 135
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 8 For your safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interferen ce, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the phone at a refuelling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your phone.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 9 CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. The keypad is active only in the Fold open mode. Press the end key as many times as need ed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900/ 1800/1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your se rvice provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legiti mate rights of others. When taking and using images or video clips, obey all laws and respect local customs as we ll as privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the de vice on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. Network Services To use the phone you must ha ve service from a wireless service provider. Many of th e features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider be fore you can utilize network services. Your service provid er may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use ne twork services. For instance, some networks may not suppo rt all language-dependent characters and services. Netw ork features are designated in this guide by . Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially co nfigured. This configuration may include changes in menu names, menu order and icons. Contact your service provider for more information.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 10 This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e-mail and content downloading via browser or over MMS, requir e network support for these technologies. For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor . This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device of f and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of an y charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the DC-4, AC -3 and AC-4 charger, and from the AC-1, ACP-7, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, LCH-8, LCH-9, or LCH-12 charger wh en used with the charger adapter CA-44 delivered with your phone. The battery intended for use with this device is BL-5B. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you di sconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 11 Your Nokia N90 Model number: Nokia N90-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N90. Modes Your device has four mech anical modes that support different use situations: Fold closed , Fold open for using the device, Imaging for recording video and taking pictures, and Camera for taking pictures. To switch between the modes, turn th e fold and the swing axis camera. There is a short ti me-out before a mode is activated. Fold open mode When you open the fold, the Fold open mode is activated automatically: the main display lights up, the keypad is available, and you can access the menu. You can scroll in the menu with the scroll key or the joystick. The Fold open mode is activated even if the fold is not fully opened. The fold opens close to 150 degrees, as shown in the picture. Do not force the fold to open more.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 12 Fold closed mode When the fold is closed, the main display is deactivated and the cover display lights up. Ongoing calls are ended, unless the loudspeaker is in use or a headset is connected. If you are using the player to listen to a sound clip, it continues to play. In the Fold closed mode, the cover display provides limited functions. On the standby mode display, the signal strength and battery indicators, operator logo, time information, status indicators, and the name of the currently ac tive profile (if other than General ) may be shown. If you are listening to a sound clip, volume bars and track in formation are displayed. If the keypad is not locked, you can use the power key, the joystick, and the capture key (for enhanced voice commands). To select commands on the display, such as Show and Back , move the joystick to highlight the desired text, and press the joystick. Calendar and clock alarms an d notes for missed calls and new received messages are also displayed. You can view received text messages and th e text and imag e objects of received multimedia messages on the cover display. To view other types of messages, open the fold, and view the message on the main display. Incoming calls are indicated by their normal tone and a note. To answer a call and us e the handset, open the fold. To answer a call and use th e loudspeaker, select Answer . If a headset is connected to the device, press the answer key on the headset. To make calls or use the menu, open the fold. Imaging mode In the Imaging mode, you can re cord videos, take pictures, edit video clips and images, and send live video during a video call . See "Camera and Gallery" , p. 41 and "Video calls" , p. 28 . To activate the Imaging mode, open the fold up to 90 degrees, hold the device sideways, and turn the fold up so that the main display faces you. The camera starts, and you can see the view to be captured. You can also turn the swing axis camera. In the Imaging mode, the camera unit turns 180 degrees counterclo ckwise and close to 135 degrees clockwise. Do not fo rce the camera unit to turn more.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 13 In the Imaging mode, the keypad is not active. You can use the capture key, joystick, po wer key, the upper and lower selection keys next to the ma in display, and to end an active call. Warning: You cannot make emergency calls in the Imaging mode, because the keypad is not active. To make an emergency call, activate the Fold open mode. Camera mode In the Camera mode, you can take pictures quickly. You can use the camera during an active call. See "Camera and Gallery" , p. 41 . To activate the Camera mode, turn the swing axis camera when the fold is closed. The viewfinder appear s on the cover display. The camera unit turns 180 degrees counterclockwise and close to 135 degrees clockwise. Do not force the camera unit to turn more. You can use the capture key, joystick, and power key in the Camera mode. Essential indicators âÂÂThe phone is being used in a GSM network. (network service)âÂÂThe phon e is being used in a UMTS network. See "Network" , p. 115 . âÂÂYou have received one or several messages to the Inbox folder in Messaging . âÂÂThere are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. See "OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent" , p. 73 . âÂÂYou have missed calls. See "Recent calls" , p. 35 . âÂÂShown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , IM alert tone , and E-mail alert tone are set to Off . See "ProfilesâÂÂSet tones" , p. 22 . âÂÂThe phone keypad is locked. See âÂÂKeypad lock (Keyguard)â in the Quick start guide. âÂÂYou have an active clock alarm. See "Clock" , p. 15 . âÂÂThe second phone line is being used. See "Call settings" , p. 107 . âÂÂAll calls to the phone are diverted to another number. If you have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the first line is and for the second . âÂÂA headset is connected to the phone. âÂÂA loopset is connected to the phone.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 14 âÂÂThe connection to a headse t with Bluetooth has been lost. âÂÂA data call is active. âÂÂA GPRS or EDGE packet da ta connection is available. âÂÂA GPRS or EDGE packet da ta connection is active. âÂÂA GPRS or EDGE packet da ta connection is on hold. These icons are shown instead of the signal strength indicator (shown in the top left corner in the standby mode). See "Packet data connections in GSM and UMTS networks" , p. 109 . âÂÂA UMTS packet data connection is available. âÂÂA UMTS packet data connection is active. âÂÂA UMTS packet data connection is on hold. âÂÂBluetooth connectivity is On . âÂÂData is being transmitted using a Bluetooth connection. See "Bluetooth connection" , p. 98 . âÂÂA USB connection is active. âÂÂYou have an e-mail that has been read, waiting for you to retrieve to your phone. âÂÂYou have an e-mail that has not been read, waiting for you to retrieve to your phone. Attach the wrist strap Thread the strap as shown in the picture, and tighten it. Configure settings To use multimedia messaging, GPRS, Internet, and other wireless services, you must have the proper configuration sett ings on your phone. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your phone, or you may receive the settings from the service providers as a special text message. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . For more information on the availability of the settings, contact your network operator, service provider, nearest author ised Nokia dealer, or visit the support area on the Nokia website, www.nokia-asia.com/support. Nokia support on the Web Check www.nokia-asia.com/support or your local Nokia Web site for the latest versio n of this guide, additional information, downloads, and se rvices related to your Nokia product.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 15 Help Your device has context-sensi tive help. You can access the help from an application or from the main menu. When an application is open, to access help for the current view, select Options > Help . Example: To view instructions on how to create a contact card, start to cr eate a contact card, and select Options > Help . When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Help . Select the desired application to view a list of help topics. To search for help topics using keywords, select Options > Search by keyword . When you are reading a help to pic, to view other related topics, press or . Clock Press , and select Clock . To set a new alarm, select Options > Set alarm . Enter the alarm time, and select OK. When the alarm is active, the indicator is shown. To turn off the alarm, select Stop . When the alarm tone sounds, press any key, or select Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it resumes. You can do this a maximum of five times. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Ye s to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an alarm, select Clock > Options > Remove alarm . Clock settings To change the clock settings, select Options > Settings in the clock. To change the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown in the standby mode, scroll down, and select Clock type > Analogue or Digital .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 16 To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone information to your phone , scroll down, and select Auto time update . For the Auto time update setting to take effe ct, the phone restarts. To change the alarm tone, scroll down, and select Clock alarm tone . To change the daylight-savin g time status, scroll down, and select Daylight-saving . Select On to add one hour to the My current city time. See "World clock" , p. 16 . When the daylight-saving is active, the indicator is shown in the clock main view. This setting is not shown if Auto time update is on. World clock Open Clock , and press to open the world clock view. In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add cities to the list, select Options > Add city . Enter the first letters of the city name. The search field appears automatically, and the matching cities are displayed. Select a city. You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, sc roll to a city, and select Options > My current city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your phone is changed according to the city select ed. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level, when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press or , respectively, or move the joystick right or left. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen to the phone from a short distance without having to hold the phone to your ear, for example, having it on a table nearby. Sound applications use the loudspeaker by default. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To locate the loudspeaker, see âÂÂKeys and partsâ in the Quick start guide. To use the loudspeaker during a call, start a call, and select Options > Activate loudsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker wh en you have an active call or are listening to a sound, select Options > Activate handset .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 17 File manager Many features of the phone use memory to store data. These features include contac ts, messages, images, ringing tones, calendar and to- do notes, documents, and downloaded applications. The free memory available depends on how much data is already saved in the phone memory. You can use a memory card as extra storage space. Memory cards are rewrit able, so you can delete and save data on a memory card. To browse files and folders in the phone memory or on a memory card (if inserted), press , and select Tools > File mgr. . The phone memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ). To move or copy files to a folder, press and at the same time to mark a file, and select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . Icons in File mgr. : Folder Folder that has a subfolder To find a file, select Options > Find and the memory from which to search, and enter a search text that matches the file name. Tip! You can use Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite to view th e different memories in your phone. See the CD-R OM supplied in the sales package. View memory consumption To view what types of data you have in the phone and how much memory the different da ta types consume, select Options > Memory details . Scroll down to Free memory to view the amount of free memory in the phone. To view the amount of free memory on the memory card, i f yo u h a v e a c a r d i n s e r t e d in t h e p h o n e , p r e s s to o p e n the memory card view, and select Options > Memory details . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory The phone notifies you if th e phone memory or memory card memory is getting low. If the phone memory starts to get low when your browser is open, then the browser is closed automatically to free some memory space. To free phone memory, transfer data to a memory card in the file manager. Mark files to be moved, select Move to folder > Memory card , and a folder.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 18 Tip! To free memory from th e phone or from the memory card, use Image Stor e available in Nokia PC Suite to transfer images and video clips to a compatible PC. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. T o r e m o v e d a t a t o f r e e m e m o r y , u s e File mgr. , or go to the respective application. For example, you can remove the following: ⢠Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the phone memory ⢠Saved Web pages ⢠Saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠Contact information â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠Downloaded applications. See also "Application manager" , p. 116 . ⢠Any other data that you no longer need Memory card tool Note: This device uses a Reduced Size Dual Voltage (1.8/3V) MultiMediaCard (RS-MMC). To ensure interoperability, use only dual voltage RS-MMCs. Check the compatibility of an RS-MMC with its manufacturer or provider. Use only compatible Reduced- Size Multimedia cards (RS- MMC) with this device. Othe r memory cards, such as Secure Digital (SD) cards, do no t fit in the memory card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card ma y damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Press , and select Tools > Memory . You can use a memory card as extra storage space. It is also good to regularly back up the information in the phone memory to the memory card. The information can be restored to the phone later. See âÂÂInserting the memory cardâ in the Quick start guide.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 19 You cannot use the memory card if the door of the memory card slot is open. Important: Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. To back up information from phone memory to a memory card, select Options > Backup phone mem. To restore information from th e memory card to the phone memory, select Options > Restore from card . Tip! To rename a memory card, select Options > Memory card name . Format a memory card When a memory card is reform atted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplied preformatted and others require formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory ca rd before you can use it. To format a memory card, select Options > Format mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. When fo rmatting is complete, enter a name for the me mory card, and select OK . Useful shortcuts Use shortcuts to quickly get the most from your device. Refer to the relevant sections in this user guide for further details of the functions. Shortcuts when taking pictures ⢠To zoom in and out, press the joystick up and down. ⢠To enter the Image setup settings, press the joystick. ⢠To change the flash mode, pr ess the joystick left or right. ⢠After you have taken a pictur e, to take a new picture, press the capture key halfway down. ⢠If you have activated an application in the Imaging mode, press the capture key to return to the camera. Shortcuts when recording videos ⢠To zoom in or zoom out, pr ess the joystick up or down. ⢠To enter the Video setup settings, press the joystick. ⢠If you have activated an application in the Imaging mode, press the capture key to return to the camera. Edit text and lists ⢠To mark an item in a list, scroll to it, and press and at the same time. ⢠To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold , while you press or . To end the selection, release , then release .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 20 ⢠To copy and paste text: Pres s and hold . At the same time, press or to select letter s and words, or or to select rows of te xt. As the selection moves, text is highlighted. To copy the text to clipboard, while still holding , press Copy . To insert the text into a document, press and hold and press Paste . Standby mode ⢠To switch between applications that are open, press and hold . If memory is low, the phone may close some applications. The phon e saves any unsaved data before closing an application. ⢠To change the profile, press , and select a profile. ⢠Press and hold to switch between General and Silent profiles. If you have two phone lines then this action will switch between the two lines. ⢠To open the last dialled numbers list, press . ⢠To use voice commands, press and hold the capture key. See "Voice commands" , p. 116 . ⢠To start a connection to Web , press and hold . See "Web" , p. 82 . For further shortcuts availabl e in the standby mode, see "Active standby mode" , p. 24 . Keypad lock (keyguard) ⢠To lock: In the standby mode, press , then . ⢠To unlock: Press , then . ⢠To lock the keypad in the Fold closed mode, press and select Lock keypad . ⢠To turn on the display light when the keypad lock is on, press . When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Enter the emergency number, and press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 21 Personalise your device Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured for your network provider. This configuration may include changes in menu names, menu order and icon s. Contact your service provider for more information. ⢠To use the standby main disp lay for fast access to your most frequently used applications, see "Active standby mode" , p. 24 . ⢠To change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the screen saver, see "Change the look of your device" , p. 24 , and "Cover display settings" , p. 116 . ⢠To customise the ringing tones, see "ProfilesâÂÂSet tones" , p. 22 . ⢠To change the shortcuts assigned for the different pr esses of the scroll key and left and right selection keys in the standby mode, see "Standby mode" , p. 106 . The scroll key shortcuts are not available if the active standby is on. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press , and select Clock > Options > Settings > Clock type > Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the clock alarm tone, press , and select Clock > Options > Settings > Clock Alarm tone and a tone. ⢠To change the calendar alarm tone, press , and select Calendar > Options > Settings > Calendar alarm tone and a tone. ⢠To change the welcome note to a text or an image, press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > General > Welcome note or logo . ⢠To assign an individual ring ing tone to a contact, press , and select Contacts . See "Add ringing tones for contacts" , p. 39 . ⢠To assign a speed dial to a contact, press a numbered key in the standby mode ( is reserved for the voice mailbox), and press . Select Yes , then select a contact.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 22 ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . You can move less used applicatio ns into folders, and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. ProfilesâÂÂSet tones To set and customise the ri nging tones, message alert tones, and other tones for di fferent events, environments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profiles . If the currently selected profile is other than General , the profile name is shown at the top of the display in the standby mode. To change the profile, press in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you wa nt to activate, and select OK . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on the memory card are indicated with . You can scroll through the tone list and listen to each one before you make your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. Tip! When you choose a tone, Tone downloads opens a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a Web page to download tones. Tip! For information on how to change the alert tone for the calendar or clock, see "Personalise your device" , p. 21 . To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . Offline profile The Offline profile lets you use the phone without connecting to the wireless ne twork. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator. All wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to se nd messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. Warning: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, except make calls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require network coverage. To make calls, you must first activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 23 Warning: Yo ur de vi ce m us t b e s wi tc he d o n t o us e Offline profile. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use is proh ibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To leave the Offline profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles , select another profile, and select Options > Activate > Yes . The phone re-enables wireless transmissions (providing th ere is sufficient signal strength). If a Bluetooth co nnection is activated before entering the Offline profile, it will be deactivated. A Bluetooth connection is auto matically reactivated after leaving the Offline profile. See "Bluetooth connection settings" , p. 99 . Transfer content from another device You can copy contacts, calend ar, images, video, and sound clips using a Bluetooth connection, from a compatible Nokia Series 60 device. You can use your Nokia N90 device without a SIM card. The offline profile is automa tically activated when the device is switched on withou t a SIM card. This allows you to use the SIM card in another device. To avoid duplicate entries, you can transfer the same type of information, for example, contacts, from the other device to your Nokia N90 only once. Before starting the transfer, you must activate Bluetooth connectivity on both devices. On each device, press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth . Select Bluetooth > On . Give a name to each device. To transfer content: 1 Press , and select Tools > Transfer on your Nokia N90. Follow the instructions on the screen. 2 The device searches for devices with Bluetooth connectivity. When it has fi nished the search, select your other phone from the list. 3 You are asked to enter a code on your Nokia N90. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other phone, and select OK . 4 The Transfer application is sent to the other phone as a message. 5 Open the message to install Transfer on the other phone, and follow the inst ructions on the screen. 6 From your Nokia N90, select the content you want to copy from the other phone.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 24 Content is copied from the me mory and memory card of the other phone to your No kia N90 and memory card. Copying time depends on th e amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel co pying and continue later. The Transfer application is added to the main menu of the other phone. Change the look of your device To change the look of your phone displays, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > Themes . The active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group together elements from other themes or select images from the Gallery to personalise themes further. The themes on the memory card are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the phone. If you want to use the themes saved in th e memory card without the memory card, save the themes in the phone memory first. See also "Cover display settings" , p. 116 . To open a browser connection and download more themes, select Theme downloads . To activate a theme, sc roll to it, and select Options > Apply . To preview a theme, sc roll to it, and select Options > Preview . To edit themes, scroll to a theme, and select Options > Edit to change the following options: ⢠Wallpaper âÂÂThe image to be shown as a background image in the standby mode. ⢠Power saver âÂÂThe power saver type on the main display: date and time, or a text you have written yourself. See also Power saver time-out , p. 107 . ⢠Image in 'Go to' âÂÂThe background image for the Go to application. To restore the selected theme ba ck to its original settings, select Options > Restore orig. theme when you edit a theme. Active standby mode Use your standby main display for fast access to your most frequently used applications. By default, the active standby mode is on. Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby , and press to switch the active standby on or off.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 25 The active standby display is shown with default applications across the top of the screen, and calendar, to-do, and player events listed below. Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default applications shortcuts: 1 Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby apps. , and press . 2 Highlight a shortcut to an application, and select Options > Change . 3 Select a new application from the list, and press . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 26 Make calls Voice calls Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, press or . If you have set the volume to Mute , you cannot adjust the volume with the scroll key. To adjust the volume, select Unmute , and then press or . 1 In the standby mode, en ter the phone number, including the area code. Press to remove a number. For international calls, press twice for the character (replaces the international access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing always ends a call, even if another application is active. Activating the Fold closed mode during an active call ends the call unless you have acti vated the loudspeaker or a headset. To make a call from Contacts , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the sear ch field. Matching contacts are listed. To call, press or select Options > Call > Voice call . If there is more than one number listed for the contact, scroll to the number you want to call and select Call . You must copy the contacts from your SIM to Contacts before you can make a call this way. See "Copy contacts" , p. 38 . To call your voice mailbox ( ) , press and hold in the standby mode. See also "Call diverting" , p. 114 . Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press , and select Tools > Voice mail > Options > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider), and select OK . To call a recently dialled nu mber in the standby mode, press to access a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number you want, and press to call the number.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 27 Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is auto matically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conference call, select Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six participan ts, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still contin ue the conference call. Once you have finished the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. To drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference call, press . Speed dial a phone number To activate speed dialling, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to on e of the speed dialling keys ( â ), press , and select Tools > Speed dial . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . is reserved for the voice mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Voice dialling Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user do es not record voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compar es the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in th e device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognise the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesised voice tag, open a contact card, and select Options > Play voice tag .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 28 Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a shor t distance away when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialling, pre ss and hold the capture key. If you are using a compatible headset with the headset key, press and hold the he adset key to start voice dialling. 2 A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickna me that is saved on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. After a timeout of 1.5 seconds, the devi ce dials the number. If the recognised contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches, or Quit to cancel voice dialling. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number, if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the firs t available number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home), Mobile (business), Telephone , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Video calls When you make a video call, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or the selected still image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video ca ll, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile phone or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while there is another voice, video, or data call active. Warning! You cannot make emergency calls in the Imaging mode because the ke ypad is not active. To make an emergency call, activate the Fold open mode.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 29 Icons: You are not receiving vide o (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, see "Call settings" , p. 107 . 1 To start a video call, in the Fold open mode, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts , and select a contact. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . 3 Activate the Imaging mode after the call recipient has answered the call. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by th e network, or the receiving device is not compatible) you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the lo udspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, in the Fold open mode, press or , or in the Imaging mode, move the joystick left or right. To change between showing vi deo or hearing only sound, select Enable / Disable > Sending video (Imaging mode only), Sending audio or Sending audio & video (Imaging mode only). To send live video image of yo urself, turn the camera unit so that the lens is facing you. To zoom your own image, move the joystick up and down to zoom in and zoom out. Th e zoom indicator is shown on the top of the display. To switch the places of th e sent video images on the display, select Change image order . If you activate the Fold open mode during a video call, sending your own video image stops because the camera is not active. You can, however, still see the video of the recipient. Note: Even if you have denied video sending during a video call, the call will still be charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your network operator or service provider. To end the video call, press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 30 Video sharing Use Video sharing to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to anothe r compatible mobile device during a voice call. Simply invi te a recipient to view the live video, or a video clip you wa nt to share. Sharing begins automatically when the recipi ent accepts the invitation, and you activate the correct mode. See "Share video" , p. 31 . Video sharing requirements Because Video sharing requires a 3G Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on 3G network availability. Contact your se rvice provider for questions about network availability and fees associated with using this application. To use Video sharing you must: â¢E n s u r e t h a t Video sharing is installed on your Nokia N90. ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. See "Settings" , p. 30 . ⢠Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS network coverage. See "Settings" , p. 30 . If you start the sharing sessi on while you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UTMS network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and th at person has his phone turned off, is not within UMTS network coverage, or does not have video sharin g installed or person-to- person connections set up, they do not know that you are sending an invitation. However, you receive an error message that the recipient cannot accept the invitation. Settings Person-to-person connection settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connec tion. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use Video sharing . Setting up a SIP pr ofile allows you to establish a live person-to-pe rson connection to another compatible phone. The SIP prof ile must also be established to receive a sharing session. Ask your network operator or service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save th em in your device. Your network operator or service provider may send you the settings over the air.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 31 If you know a recipientâÂÂs SIP address, you can enter it on your contact card fo r that person. Open Contacts from your device main menu, and ope n the contact card (or start a new card for that person). Select Options > Add detail > Web address . Enter the SIP address in a format sip:username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). UTMS connection settings To set up your UMTS co nnection, do the following: ⢠Contact your service pr ovider to establish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that your device UM TS access point connection settings are configured properly. For help, see "Connection settings" , p. 108 . Share video To receive a sharing session, the recipient must install Video sharing and configure the required settings on their mobile device. You and the recipient must both be registered to the service be fore you can start sharing. To receive share invitations, you must be registered to the service, have an active UMTS connection, and be within the UMTS network coverage. Live video 1 When a voice call is active, select Options > Share video > Live . 2 The phone sends the invitati on to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If the recipient has several SIP addresses in the contact card, select the SIP address to which you want to send the invitation, and Select to send the invitation. If the SIP address of the reci pient is not available, enter a SIP address. Select OK to send the invitation. 3 Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accepts the invitation, and you activate the Imaging mode. See "Imaging mode" , p. 12 . When you activate the Imaging mode, the loudspeaker is active. You can also use a headset to continue your voice call while you share live video. 4 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Continue to resume sharing. 5 To end the sharing session, in the Imaging mode, return to the Fold open mode. To end the voice call, press the End key. Video clip 1 When a voice call is active, select Options > Share video > Clip . A list of video clips opens.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 32 2 Select a video clip you want to share. A preview view opens. To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 3 Select Options > Invite . You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. Clip must be converted for sharing. Continue? appears. Select OK . The phone sends the invitati on to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. In case the recipient has se veral SIP addresses in the contact card, select the SIP address to which you want to send the invitation, and Select to send the invitation. If the SIP address of the reci pient is not available, enter a SIP address. Select OK to send the invitation. 4 Sharing begins automaticall y in the Fold open mode when the recipient acce pts the invitation. See "Fold open mode" , p. 11 . 5 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Options > Continue to resume sharing. 6 To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the End key. Accept an invitation When someone sends you a share invitation, an invitation message is displayed showing the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to Silent , it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation, you can select: ⢠Accept to begin the sharing se ssion. If the sender wants to share live video, activate the Imaging mode. ⢠Reject to decline the invitation . The sender receives a message that you rejected th e invitation. You can also press the End key to declin e the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. To disconnect the session, when sharing a live video, return to the Fold open mode. If yo u share a video clip, select Exit . Sharing ended is displayed. Answer or reject a call To answer the call in the Fold open mode, press . If Anykey answer is set to On , to answer a call in the Fold closed mode, open the fold, and the call starts automatically. Otherwise, open the fold, and press . To answer a call, and use the loud speaker in the Fold closed mode, select Answer () . To mute the ringing tone wh en a call comes in, select Silence .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 33 Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the device, to answer and end a call, press the headset key. If you do not want to answer a call, in the Fold open mode, press to reject it. In th e Fold closed mode, select Reject . The caller hears a line busy to ne. If you have activated the Call divert settings > If busy function to divert calls, rejecting an incoming call also diverts the call. See "Call diverting" ,p . 114 . When you reject an incoming call in the Fold open mode, you can also send a text message to the caller informing why you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message . You can edit the text before sending it. To set up this option and write a standard text message, see "Call settings" , p. 107 . If you answer a voice call during a video call, the video call is dropped. Call waiting is not available during a video call. Answer or reject a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. Tip! You can assign a ringin g tone for video calls. Press and select Tools > Profiles , select a profile and Options > Personalise > Video call tone . In the Fold open mode, press to answer the video call. To start sending video, acti vate the Imaging mode, and a live video image, recorded video clip, or the image being captured by the camera in yo ur device is shown to the caller. If you want to send a live video image, turn the camera unit to the direction from which you want to send the video image. If you do no t activate the Imaging mode, video sending is not possible , but you can still hear the other person. A grey screen is shown in place of the video. To replace the grey screen with a still image, see "Call settings" , Image in video call , p. 107 . Tip! To send video of yourself, in the Imaging mode turn the camera unit so that the lens is facing you. If you activate the Fold open mode during a video call, sending your own video image stops because the camera is not active. You can, however, still see the video of the recipient. Note: Even if you have denied video sending during a video call, the call will still be charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your network operator or service provider. To end the video call, in the Imaging mode or in the Fold open mode, press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 34 Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activated Call waiting in Tools > Settings > Call > Call waiting . To answer the waiting call, pre ss . The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two calls, select Swap . Select Options > Transfer to connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from the calls. To end the active call, press . To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Options during a voice call Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Select Options during a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unmute , Answer, Reject , Swap , Hold or Unhold , Activate handset , Activate loudsp. , or Activate handsfree (if a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached), End active call or End all calls , New call , Conference , and Transfer. Select from the following: Replace âÂÂTo end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call. Send MMS (in UMTS networks only)âÂÂTo send an image or a video in a multimedia messa ge to the other participant of the call. You can edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Pre ss to send the file to a compatible device ( ). Send DTMF âÂÂTo send DTMF tone strings, for example, a password. Enter the DTMF stri ng or search for it in Contacts . To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to send the tone. Tip! You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Options during a video call Select Options during a video call for the following options: Enable or Disable (audio in the Fold open mode; video, audio, or both in the Imaging mode), Activate handset (if a headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached), Activate loudsp. , or Activate handsfree (Fold open mode only, and if a headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached), End active call , Change image order , Zoom in / Zoom out (Imaging mode only), and Help .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 35 Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialled calls, press , and select My own > Log > Recent calls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. Tip! When you see a note in the standby mode about missed calls, select Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main vi ew. To clear one of the call registers, open the register yo u want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select My own > Log > Call duration . To set the call duration to sh ow on the display each time a call is active, select My own > Log > Options > Settings > Show call duration . Select Yes or No . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off fo r billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you need the lock code, see "Security" , "Phone and SIM" , p. 111 . Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connection s, press , and select My own > Log > Packet data . For example, you may be charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log : Incoming Outgoing Missed communication events
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 36 To monitor all voice and video calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, press , select My own > Log , and press to open the general log. For each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, name of the service provider, or access point. You can filter the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information. Tip! If you want to see the dura tion of a voice call on the main display during an active call, select Options > Settings > Show call duration > Yes . Tip! To view a list of sent messages, press , and select Messaging > Sent . Subevents, such as a text me ssage sent in more than one part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Conn ections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or Web pages are shown as packet data connections. To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the l og, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Select Yes to confirm. To set the Log duration , select Options > Settings > Log duration . The log events remain in the phone memory for a set number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory. If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls regist er, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. To view the details of a co mmunication event, in the general log view scroll to an ev ent, and press the scroll key. Tip! In the details view you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it to a text message, for example. Select Options > Copy Number . Packet data counter and connection timer : To view how much data, measured in kiloby tes, is transferred and how long a certain packet data conn ection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View details .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) 37 Contacts (Phonebook) Press , and select Contacts . In Contacts you can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can also create co ntact groups, which allow you to sen d t ex t m es sag es or e- mai l t o m an y r ec ipi en ts at th e same time. You can add rece ived contact information (business cards) to contacts. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . Contact information can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Tip! Regularly back up the phone information to the memory card. You can restore the information, such as contacts, to the phone later. See "Memory card tool" , p. 18 . You can also use Nokia PC Suite to back up your contacts to a compatible PC. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Options in Contacts are Open , Call , Create message , New contact , Open conversation , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group , Belongs to groups , Mark/ Unmark , Copy / Copy to SIM direct. , SIM contacts , Go to web address , Send , Memory details , Settings , Help , and Exit . Save names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . Tip! If you use video sharing with a contact, save the contactâÂÂs session initiation protocol (SIP) address to the Web address field of the contact card. Enter the SIP address in the format sip:username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). To edit contact cards in Contacts , scroll to the contact card you want to edit, and select Options > Edit . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press . To delete several cont act cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete. Tip! To add and edit cont act cards, use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. To attach a small thumbnail im age to a contact card, open the contact card, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) 38 Tip! Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign speed dialling keys to eight phone numbers. See "Speed dial a phone number" , p. 27 . Tip! To send contact informat ion, select the card you want to send. Select Options > Send > Via text message , Via multimedia , or Via Bluetooth . See "Messaging" , p. 63 and "Send data using a Bluetooth connection" , p. 99 . Default numbers and addresses You can assign default number s or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to the contact to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1 In contacts, select a contact, and press . 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an addr ess you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts If you have phone numbers st ored on the SIM card, copy them to Contacts . Entries that are saved only on the SIM card are not shown in the co ntacts directory, and for incoming calls and messages, the device cannot match the number to the name. When a new SIM card is inse rted in the device and you open Contacts for the first time, you are asked if you want to copy the contact entries on the SIM card to the device memory. Select Yes to copy the entries to your contacts directory. To copy individual names an d numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, press , and select Contacts . Select the names yo u want to copy and Options > Copy to SIM direct. , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synchronise your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) 39 SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and in formation on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor . This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, an d you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dialling contacts . This setting is only shown if supporte d by your SIM card. To restrict calls from your phone to selected phone numbers, select Options > Activ. fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Options > New SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when se nding text messages over a packet data connection. In th is case, the message centre number and the recipientâ s phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list. When fixed dialing is activated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Add ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group me mber calls you, the phone plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your phone recognises it). 1 Press to open a contact ca rd, or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you wish to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Create contact groups Options in the groups list view are Open , New group , Delete , Rename , Ringing tone , Memory details , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group , and select OK . 4 Open the group, and select Options > Add members .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) 40 5 Scroll to a contact, and pr ess to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, open th e group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from group . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which grou ps a contact belongs, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Belongs to groups .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 41 Camera and Gallery Camera The Nokia N90 device su pports an image capture resolution of 1600 x 1200 pi xels. The image resolution in these materials may appear different. To activate the camera, activate the Imaging mode. See "Imaging mode" , p. 12 . The camera starts, and you can see the view to be captured. Warning! You cannot make emergency calls in the Imaging mode because the keypad is not active. To make an emergency call, activate the Fold open mode. If the camera is in Video mode , open the image mode by selecting Options > Image mode . The images are automatically sa ved in the gallery in .jpeg format. You can send images in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment or using a Bluetooth connection. Take pictures in the Imaging mode To make lighting and colour adjustments before taking a picture, press the jo ystick, and select Flash , White balance , Exposure value , or Colour tone . See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . To select a scene, press the joystick, and select Scene . See "Scenes" , p. 44 . Your device also has a swin g axis camera, which makes capturing views in different si tuations easier. You can turn the camera unit clockwise and counterclockwise. See "Camera mode" , p. 13 . Options before taking a picture are Video mode , Go to Gallery , Image setup , Sequence mode / Normal mode , Activate self-timer , Settings , and Help . To lock the focus on an ob ject, press the capture key halfway down. The green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus wa s not locked, the red locked focus indicator appears. Release the capture key, and press it again halfway down. You can, however, take the picture without locking the focus.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 42 To take a picture, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved. The image is saved automatically in the Images & video folder of Gallery . See "Gallery" , p. 54 . Tip! You can also take pictures conveniently in the Camera mode. See "Take pictures in the Camera mode" , p. 46 . Imaging mode camera indicators show the following: ⢠The phone memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where images are saved. ⢠The images indicator (2) estimates how many images, depending on the selected image quality, can fit in the remaining memory of your de vice or the memory card. ⢠The scene indicator (3) sh ows the active scene. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . ⢠The flash indicator (4) shows if the flash is set to Automatic () , Red eye redu. () , Forced () , o r Off () . ⢠The green focus indicator (5) is displayed when the focus point is locked by the viewfinder (not visible in sequence mode). ⢠The self-timer indicator (6) shows that the self-timer is activated. See "You in the pictureâÂÂself- timer" , p. 43 . ⢠The sequence mode indicator (7) shows that the sequence mode is active. See "Take pictures in a sequence" , p. 43 . ⢠The resolution indicator (8) shows the selected image quality. See "Adjust still image camera settings" , p. 45 Shortcuts are as follows: ⢠Press the joystick up and down to zoom in and zoom out. The zoom indicator, which appears on the side pane, shows the zoom level. ⢠Press the joystick to enter the Image setup settings. See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . ⢠Press the joystick left or ri ght to change the flash mode. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. When taking a picture, note the following: ⢠It is recommended to use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠To take images or record video in different environments, use the proper scene for each environment. See "Scenes" , p. 44 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 43 ⢠To make lighting and colour adjustments before taking a picture, press the joystick, or select Options > Image setup > Scene , Flash , White balance , Exposure value , or Colour tone . See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . ⢠The quality of a zoomed pict ure is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no key presses in a while. To continue taking pictures, press the capture key. After the image is taken, note the following: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Options > Delete . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press the capture key halfway down. â¢T o s e n d t h e i m a g e Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth , select Options > Send . For more information, see "Messaging" , p. 63 and "Bluetooth connection" , p. 98 . This option is not available during an active call. ⢠To send an image to the other party during an active call, select Options > Send to caller . ⢠To edit the picture, select Options > Edit . See "Edit images" , p. 47 . ⢠To print the picture, select Options > Print . See "Image print" , p. 57 . Take pictures in a sequence Select Options > Sequence mode to set the camera to take six pictures in a sequ ence. You can also use the sequence mode with the Activate self-timer . See "You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer" , p. 43 . The pictures are automatically saved in Gallery . To take the pictures, press and hold the capture key. If you want to take less than six pictures, release the capture key after the desired amount of pictures. After taking the pictures, they are shown in a grid on the main display. To view a pictur e, press the joystick to open it. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key halfway down. You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer Use the self-timer to delay the taking of a picture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, select Options > Activate self-timer > 2 seconds or 10 seconds . To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The self-timer indicator ( ) blinks and the device beeps when the timer is running. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay has elapsed. You can also use the Activate self-timer in the sequence mode. See "Take pictures in a sequence" , p. 43 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 44 Tip! Select Options > Activate self-timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Flashlight Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera has an LED flashlig ht for low light conditions. The following flashlight modes are available: Automatic () , Red eye redu. () , Forced () , a n d Off () . Select Options > Image setup > Flash > Forced to use the flashlight. If the flashlight is set to Off or Automatic during bright conditions, the flashlight stil l emits a low light when an image is captured. This allows the subject of the picture to see when the picture is taken. There is no flashlight effect on the resultant picture. If the flashlight is set to Red eye redu. , it decreases the redness of the eyes in the picture. Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting To enable the camera to re produce colours and lighting more accurately, or to add e ffects to your pictures or videos, select Options > Image setup or Video setup , and select from the fo llowing options: Scene âÂÂSelect a proper scene for the environment in which you are taking pictures. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . Every scene uses its own lighting settings that have been adjusted according to a certain kind of environment. Flash (images only)âÂÂSet the flash to Automatic , Red eye redu. , Forced , or Off . See "Flashlight" , p. 44 . White balance âÂÂSelect the current lig hting condition from the list. This allows the came ra to reproduce colours more accurately. Exposure value (images only)âÂÂAdjust the exposure time of the camera. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a colour effect from the list. The screen display changes to match any settings made, showing you how the change affe cts the pictures or videos. The settings return to the defa ult settings when you close the camera. If you select a new scene, the settings are replaced by the settings of the selected scene. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . If you, however, need to change the setup settings, you can change th em after selecting a scene. Scenes A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the current enviro nment. Select a proper scene for taking pictures or record ing video clips from a scenes list. The settings of each scen e have been set according to a certain style, or environmen t in which the pictures are
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 45 taken. Select Options > Image setup / Video setup > Scene : Video scenes Normal ( )(default)âÂÂUse this scene in all conditions. Night ( )âÂÂUse this scene in low light conditions. Image scenes Automatic ( ) (default)âÂÂUse this scene in all conditions. Close-up mode ( )âÂÂUse this scene for close up photography. Night ( )âÂÂUse this scene in low light conditions. Sports ( )âÂÂUse this scene to take pictures of fast moving objects. Note that wh en you use this scene, the resolution of the images is reduced from 1600x1200 to 800x600. See Image quality , p. 45 . Portrait ( )âÂÂUse this scene to take portrait pictures, such as head shots and sitting poses. Landscape ( )âÂÂUse this scene when you take pictures of objects that are further away. User defined ( )âÂÂUse this scene to create a personalised scene with your own flash, wh ite balance, exposure value, and colour tone settings. When taking pictures, the default scene is Automatic . If you, however, select the User defined scene, it is set as the default scene. To make your own scene suitable for a certain environment, select User defined scene. In the user scene you can adjust Based on scene , Flash, White balance, Exposure value , Colour tone , and Reset user scene options. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene and the desired scene. Adjust still image camera settings There are two kinds of setting s for the still image camera in the Imaging mode: Image setup settings and main settings. To adjust Image setup settings, see "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â High 2M - Print (resolution 1600x1200), Med. 0.5M - Email (resolution 800x600), or Low 0.3M - MMS (resolution 640x480). The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. The quality of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. If you want to print the image, select High 2M - Print . If you want to send it through e-mail, select Med. 0.5M -
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 46 Email . To send the image through MMS, select Low 0.3M - MMS . Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Show focus point (image only)âÂÂSelect Yes i f y o u w a n t t h e focus point to be visible on the main display when taking a picture. Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or No if you want to continue taking pi ctures immediately. Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your images. Take pictures in the Camera mode The camera in the Camera mode can be activated and used also during an active call. 1 To activate the Camera mode, turn the camera unit in the Fold closed mode. See "Camera mode" , p. 13 . The active keypad lock is deactivated, and the viewfinder appears on the cover display. To zoom in or zoom out, mo ve the joystick to the right or to the left. 2 To lock the focus on an ob ject, press the capture key halfway down. The green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, the red locked focus indicator ap pears. Release the capture key, and press it again halfway down. You can, however, take the picture without locking the focus. 3 To take the picture, press the capture key all the way down. The picture is automati cally saved in the gallery. See "Gallery" , p. 54 . To keep the image on the disp lay after taking it, hold the capture key down. To return to the viewfinder, release the capture key. Camera mode indicators show the following: ⢠The mode indicator (1) shows the active scene. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . ⢠The phone memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (2) show where images are saved. ⢠The images indicator (3) estimates how many images, depending on the
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 47 selected image quality, can fit in the remaining memory of your device or the memory card. ⢠The green focus indicator (4) is displayed when the focus point is locked by the viewfinder. ⢠The self-timer indicator (5) shows that the self-timer is activated. See "You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer" , p. 43 . ⢠The flash indicator (6) show s if the flash is set to Automatic () , Red eye redu. () , Forced () , o r Off ( ). Select between the fl ash modes by moving the joystick up or down. You can see the flash mode in the pop-up window on the display. ⢠The zoom indicator (7) shows the zoom level. Move the joystick left and right to zoom in and zoom out. ⢠The joystick indicator ( ) (8) indicates that the Options menu is available. Pr ess the joystick to open the Options menu. To close the camera in the Came ra mode, return to the Fold closed mode by turning the camera unit. See "Fold closed mode" , p. 12 . Camera mode options To adjust the image settings, press the joystick, and select from the following options: Shooting mode âÂÂTo select a proper scene for the image capturing environment. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . Flip view âÂÂTo flip the picture 180 degrees. You need this option when you take a pictur e, for example, of yourself; when you turn the camera unit so that it is facing you, the viewfinder is upside down. Self-timer âÂÂTo activate the self-timer. Select 2 seconds or 10 seconds . Exposure value âÂÂTo adjust the brightness of the picture. Settings âÂÂTo adjust the Image quality , Memory in use , and Show captured img. settings. See "Adjust still image camera settings" , p. 45 . Edit images To edit the pictures after taki ng them, or the ones already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . You can open the Gallery application in the Imagin g mode or in the Fold open mode. Options in the edit main view are Apply effect , Close edit , Undo , Send , Full screen / Normal screen , Zoom in / Zoom out , Save , Print and Help . Select Apply effect to, for example, crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightne ss, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text , clip art, or a frame to the picture. To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop . Select Manual to crop the image size manually, or select a
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 48 predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Manual , a cross appears on the upper le ft corner of the image. To move the cross, and select the area to be cropped, move the joystick. Select Set . Another cross appears on the lower right corner. Select again th e area to be cropped, and select Crop . The selected areas form the cropped image. To reduce redness of the eyes in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press the joysti ck. A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, move the joystick. Press the joys tick to reduce the redness. To add clip art to an image, select Options > Apply effect > Clip-art . Select the item you want to add from the list, and press the joystick. To move, rotate, and change the size of the item, select Options > Move , Resize , or Rotate . To add text to an image, select Options > Apply effect > Text . Enter the text, and select OK . To edit the text, select Options > Move , Resize , Rotate , or Select colour . Shortcuts in the Fold open mode: ⢠To view an image in full sc reen, press . To return to the normal view, press again. ⢠To rotate an image clockw ise or counterclockwise, press and . ⢠To zoom in or zoom out, press and . Tips on taking good photographs By turning the swing axis ca mera, capturing the views in demanding situations is easi er. You can turn the camera unit clockwise or co unterclockwise. See "Camera mode" , p. 13 . Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quality. The camera has three picture quality modes ( High 2M - Print , Med. 0.5M - Email , and Low 0.3M - MMS ). Use the High 2M - Print setting to make sure that the camera produces the best picture quality available. Note however, that better picture quality requires more storage space. For MMS and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use the Med. 0.5M - Email or Low 0.3M - MMS setting. To define the quality in the image mode in the camera, select Options > Settings . Background Use a simple background. For portraits and other pictures with people, avoid having yo ur subject in front of a cluttered, complex background that may distract attention from the subject. Move the camera, or the subject, when these conditions cannot be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer portraits.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 49 Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your pictures by placing obje cts into the foreground. Note however, that if the foregr ound object is too close to camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the source, amount, and direction of light can change photographs dramatical ly. Here are some typical lighting conditions: ⢠Light source behind the subject. Avoid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the subject or visible in the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted light effects. You can also use the flashlight to add more lighting to shadows. See "Flashlight" , p. 44 . ⢠Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too hars h, resulting in too much contrast. ⢠Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause the subjects to squint their eyes. The contrast may also be too high. ⢠Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy da y or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Record videos To activate the camera and the viewfinder on the main display, activate the Imaging mode. See "Take pictures in the Imaging mode" , p. 41 . The camera starts, and you can see the view to be captured. If the camera is in Image mode , open the video recorder view by selecting Options > Video mode . To make lighting and colour adjustments before recording a video, press the joystick, and select White balance , or Colour tone . See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . To select a scene, press the joystick, and select Scene . See "Scenes" , p. 44 . Options before recording video are Image mode , Go to Gallery , Video setup , Settings , and Help . 1 Press the capture key to start recording. The record icon is shown. The LED flash is lit, and a tone sounds, indicating to the subject th at video is being recorded. There is no flash effect on the resultant video. 2 To pause recording at any time, select Pause . The pause icon blinks on the display. Video recording automatically stops if reco rding is set to pause and there are no key presses within a minute. 3 Select Continue to resume recording.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 50 4 Select Stop , or press the capture key to stop recording. The video clip is automatically saved to the Images & video folder of Gallery . See "Gallery" , p. 54 . Video recorder indicators show the following: ⢠The phone memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where the video is saved. ⢠The current video length indicator (2) shows elapsed time and time remaining. ⢠The scene indicator (3) shows the acti ve scene. See "Scenes", p. 44 . ⢠The microphone indicator (4) shows that the microphone is muted. ⢠The file format indicator (5) indicates the format of the video clip according to the selected video quality . ⢠The video quality indicator (6) shows the selected video clip quality . See "Video settings" , p. 50 . Shortcuts are as follows: ⢠Press the joystick up or down to zoom in or zoom out. The zoom indicator, which appears on the side pane, shows the zoom level. ⢠Press the joystick to enter the Video setup settings. See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . After a video clip is recorded: ⢠To immediately play the vide o clip you just recorded, select Options > Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Options > Delete . ⢠To return to the vi ewfinder to record a new video, press the capture key. ⢠To send the video Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth , select Options > Send . For more information, see "Messaging" , p. 63 and "Bluetooth connection" , p. 98 . This option is not available during an active call. ⢠To send a video clip to the other party during an active call, select Options > Send to caller . ⢠To edit the video, select Options > Edit . See "Edit video clips" , p. 51 . Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder in the Imaging mode: Video setup settings and main settings. To adjust Video setup settings, see "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . The setup settings return to the default settings after you cl ose the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 51 change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Audio recording âÂÂSelect On if you want to record both image and sound. Video quality âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to High , Normal , or Sharing . The quality is indi cated with one of the following icons: (High), (Normal), or (Sharing). If you select High or Normal , the length of the video recording is restricted by the available space on your memory card, and up to 1 hour per clip. If you want to view the video on a TV or PC, select High video quality, which has CIF resolution (352x288) and file format .mp4. You cannot send video clips save d in the .mp4 format in a multimedia message. If you want to view the clip in mobile phones, select Normal , which has QCIF resolution (176x144) and file format .3 gp. To send the video clip through MMS, or send it th rough video sharing, select Sharing (QCIF resolution, file format .3gp). See "Video sharing" , p. 30 . The video clip is limited to 300 kB (approximately 20 seconds in du ration) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Some ne tworks, however, may only support sending of multimedia messages with a maximum size of 100 kB. Contact your service provider for more information. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery . Selecting Yes opens a list of available albums. Show captured video âÂÂIf you select Yes , you can play the recorded video clip right after it is recorded by selecting Options > Play in the camera. If you select No , you can record a new video immediately. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store: phone memory or memory card. If the phone memory starts to get low, recording quality may decrease. To free phone memory, move data to a compatible memory card or a PC, or delete data. Tip! You can set the camera to use a compatible memory card for saving video by selecting Options > Settings > Memory in use > Memory card . Edit video clips You can edit video clips in Gallery in the Fold open mode or in the Imaging mode. See "Take pictures in the Imaging mode" , p. 41 , and "Gallery" , p. 54 . To edit video clips and create custom video clips, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit . You can create custom video clips by combinin g and trimming video clips, and adding images, sound clips, transitions, and effects.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 52 Transitions are visual effects that you can add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip timeline and sound clip timeli ne. If you add images, text, or transitions to a video clip, they are shown on the video clip timeline. To move on the ti melines, scroll left or right. To switch between the time lines, scroll up or down. Edit video, sound, image, text, and transitions To create custom video clips, mark and select one or more video clips, and select Options > Edit . In the Edit video view, you can insert video clips to make a custom video clip, and edit the clips by trimming and adding effects. You can add images and sound clips and change their duration, and also add text and transitions to the clip. Press and to move between the video clip and the sound clip. To modify the video, select from the following options: Edit video clip : Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip in the Cut video clip view. Add colour effect âÂÂInserts a colour ef fect on the video clip. Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of the video clip. Mute sound / Unmute sound âÂÂMutes or unmutes the original video clip sound. Move (shown only if two or more video clips have been inserted)âÂÂMoves the video clip to the selected location. Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of the selected video clip. Edit text (shown only if you have added text)âÂÂTo move, remove or duplicate text; chan ge the colour and style of the text; define how long it stays on the screen; and add effects to the text. Edit image (shown only if you have added an image)âÂÂTo move, remove or duplicate an image; define how long it stays on the screen; and se t a background or a colour effect to the image. Edit sound clip : Cut âÂÂTrims the sound clip in the Cut sound clip view. Move (shown only if two or more sound clips have been inserted)âÂÂMoves the sound clip to the selected location. Set duration âÂÂChanges the length of the sound clip. Remove âÂÂRemoves the sound cl ip from the video.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 53 Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of the selected sound clip. Edit transition âÂÂThere are three types of transitions: at the start of a video, at the end of a video, and transitions between video clips. A start transition can be selected when the first transition of the video is active. Insert : Video clip âÂÂInserts the selected video clip. A thumbnail of the video clip is shown in the main view. A thumbnail consists of the first non-blac k view of the video clip. The name and length of the select ed video clip is also shown. Image âÂÂInserts the selected im age. A thumbnail of the image is shown in the main view. Text âÂÂInserts text to the video c lip. You can insert a title, subtitle, or credits. Sound clip âÂÂInserts the selected sound clip. The name and length of the selected sound clip is shown in the main view. New sound clip âÂÂRecords a new sound c lip to the selected location. Movie âÂÂTo preview the movie in full screen or as a thumbnail, save the movie, or cut the movie to a proper size for sending it in a multimedia message. Tip! To take a snapshot of a video clip, select Options > Take snapshot in the thumbnail Preview view or in the Cut video clip view. To cut a video or sound clip, move to the preferred timeline and select Options > Edit video clip > Cut or Options > Edit sound clip > Cut . In the Cut video clip view or Cut sound clip view, to mark the st arting point of the video or sound clip, select Options > Start mk. To mark the end of the video or sound clip, select Options > End mark . To play the cut clip, select Options > Play marked section . To save the changes, press Done . To save your video, in the vi deo editor main view, select Options > Movie > Save . To define the Memory in use , select Options > Settings . The default is the phone memory. Tip! In the Settings view, you can define Default video name , Default sc. shot name , Resolution , and Memory in use .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 54 Select Send > Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth if you want to send the video. Contact your service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send . If your video is too large to be sent in a multimedia message, the symbol appears. Select Options > Movie > Edit for MMS to cut the movie. Tip! If you want to send a vi deo clip that is over the maximum multimedia messag e size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth. See "Send data using a Bluetooth connection" , p. 99 . You can also transfer your videos using Bluetooth into yo ur Bluetooth-enabled personal computer, or by using a memory card reader (enhancement). Gallery To store and organise your imag es, video clips, sound clips, playlists, and streaming links, in the Fold open mode, press , and select Gallery . To open the gallery in the Imaging mode, select Options > Go to Gallery . In the Imaging mode, only the Images & video folder is available. Tip! To switch from Gallery to the camera in the Imaging mode, select Camera. Select Images & video , Tracks , Sound clips , Links , or All files , and press to open it. You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. Sound clips, video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in the RealPlayer application. See "RealPlayerâ¢" , p. 58 . You can also create albums; and mark, copy, and add items to albums. See "Albums" , p. 56 . Tip! You can transfer images from your device to a compatible PC with Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Press to open a file. Vide os, music, and sound clips open in RealPlayer . See "View images and video clips" , p. 55 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 55 To copy or move files to th e memory card or to phone memory, select a file and Options > Organise > Copy to memory card / Move to memory card or Copy to phone mem. / Move to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . To download files into Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select th e download icon, for example ( ) to download images. Th e browser opens, and you can select a bookmark from which the site can download. View images and video clips Pictures taken and video clip s recorded with the camera are stored in the Images & video folder in Gallery . The quality of a video clip is indicated with one of the following icons: (High), (Normal), or (Sharing). For more information on video quality, see "Video settings" , p. 50 . Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through a Bluetooth connection. To be able to view a received image or video clip in the gallery or in the media player, you must save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. Open the Images & video folder in Gallery . The images and video clip files are in a l oop, and ordered by date. The number of files can be seen on the display. To browse the files, scroll up or down. Press and hold the scroll key up or down to browse the files in a continuous loop. To move several files at a time, scroll left or right. Tip! To navigate and open files in the Imaging mode, use the joystick. Options in the Images & video main view are Open (images only), Play (videos only), Send , Go to Camera , Add to Album , Albums , Print (images only), Edit , Delete , Organise , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . To edit a photo or a video clip, select Options > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. To add an image or a video clip to an album in the gallery, select Options > Add to Album . See "Albums" , p. 56 . To create custom video clips, select a video clip, or several clips, in the gallery, and select Options > Edit . See "Edit video clips" , p. 51 . Options when viewing an image are Zoom in , Send , Add to album , Set as wallpaper , Add to contact , Print , Edit , Delete , Rename , View details , Add to 'Go to' , Help , and Exit . To print your images on a prin ter connected to your device, or to store them on your MMC for later printing with a compatible device, select Options > Print . See "Image print" , p. 57 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 56 To zoom an image, select Options > Zoom in . The zooming ratio is at the top of the disp lay. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To delete an image or a video clip, press . Albums With albums you can convenie ntly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Albums . The albums are ordered alphabetical ly. To view the content of an album, press the scroll key. To create a new album, select Options > New album . Enter a name for the album, and select OK . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip, and press the scroll key. To remove a file from an al bum, press . The file is not deleted from the Images & video folder in Gallery .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 57 Imaging Image print You can print images with Image print by selecting the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, image viewer, or the acti ve standby mode. Use Image print to print your images using a data cable, a Bluetooth connection, or your memory card. You can only print images wh ich are in .jpg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpg format. Note: To print to a PictBri dge-compliant printer, select the print option be fore you connect the USB cable. Select the image you want to print and Options > Print . Printer selection When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available printers is displayed after you select the image. Select a printer you want to us e. The printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a Pict Bridge-compliant USB printer using the CA-53 cable supplie d with your device, the printer is automatically displayed. If the default printer is not available, a list of available printing devices is displayed again. To change the default printer, select Options > Settings > Default printer . Print preview The print preview view opens only when you start printing an image in the gallery or the active standby mode. The images that you sele cted are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left and right through the available layo uts for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. Options in print preview are Print , Settings, Help, and Exit .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 58 Print settings The available settings options vary, depending on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. RealPlayer⢠Press , and select RealPlayer . With RealPlayer, you can play video clips, sound clips, and playlists, or stream media files over the air. You can ac tivate a streaming link when you browse Web pages, or stor e it in the phone memory or memory card. You can use Real Player also in the Imaging mode with limited key functions. See "Take pictures in the Imaging mode" , p. 41 . RealPlayer supports files with ext ensions such as .aac, .awb, .m4a, .mid, .mp3, and .wav. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support al l file formats or all the variations of file formats. For example, RealPlayer will attempt to open all .mp4 file s, but some .mp4 files may include content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not su pported by this device. Tip! You can transfer music file s from your device to your memory card with Nokia Audio Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Play video or sound clips Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level.Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Options in RealPlayer when a clip is selected are Play / Continue , Play in full screen , Continue in full scr. , Stop , Mute / Unmute , Clip details , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 To play a media file stored in phone memory, or on the memory card, select Options > Open and select: Most recent clips âÂÂTo play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer . Saved clip âÂÂTo play a file saved in Gallery . See "Gallery" , p. 54 . Mem. card sound clips âÂÂTo create a track list and play the files saved in the memory card. See "Create a track list" , p. 59 . 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. Tip! To view a video clip in full screen mode, press . Press again to change back to normal screen mode.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 59 Icons in RealPlayer : âÂÂRepeat; âÂÂRa ndom; â Repeat and random; and âÂÂLoudspeaker muted. Shortcuts during play: ⢠To fast forward video, press and hold . ⢠To rewind through the vide o clip, press and hold . ⢠To mute the sound, press and hold until the indicator is displayed. To tu rn on the sound, press and hold until you see the indicator. Create a track list To create a track list of th e music tracks on your phone memory, or on the memory card: 1 Select Options > New track list . 2 Select the memory from whic h you want to select the music tracks. 3 Enter a name for the track list. 4 To mark the music tracks you want to include in the track list, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all . 5 Select Options > Select marked items . Tip! To leave the application open and music playing in the background, press twice to return to the standby mode. To return to the application, press , and select RealPlayer . Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an Internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. The access points may be conf igured when you first start your device. Contact your service provid er for more information. Note: In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer will recognise an http link to a .ram file. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a Web page, or received in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your devi ce connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. Receive RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special text message from the network ope rator or service provider. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Change the RealPlayer settings Select Options > Settings and from the following:
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 60 Video âÂÂTo have RealPlayer automatically repeat video clips after they finish playing. Audio âÂÂTo select if you want to re peat playing of track lists and play sound clips on a tr ack list in random order. Connection âÂÂTo select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access poin t, and set the port range used when connecting. Contac t your service provider for the correct settings. Proxy settings : ⢠Use proxy âÂÂTo use a proxy server, select Yes. ⢠Proxy serv. address âÂÂEnter the IP address of the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the port number of the proxy server. Glossary : Proxy servers are intermediate servers between media servers and their users. Some service providers use them to provid e additional security or speed up access to browser pages that contain sound or video clips. Network settings : ⢠Default access point âÂÂScroll to the access point you want to use to connect to the Internet, and press . ⢠Online time âÂÂSet the time for RealPlayer to disconnect from the network when you have paused a media clip playing through a network link, select User defined , and press . Enter the time, and select OK . ⢠Lowest UDP port âÂÂEnter the lowest port number of the servers port range. The default value is 6970. ⢠Highest UDP port âÂÂEnter the highest port number of the servers port range. Th e default value is 32000. Select Options > Advanced settings to edit the bandwidth values for different networks. Movie Director To create muvees, press , and select Imaging > Movie . muvees are short, edited vi deo clips that may contain video, images, music, and text. Quick muvee is created automatically by Movie director after you select the style for the muvee. Movie director randomly selects images, and uses the default music and text associated with the chosen style. Every style has its own font style, colour, music, and pace. In a Custom muvee you can select your own video and music clips, images and style, and add opening and closing message. You can send muvees with MMS. Open Movie , and press or to move between the and views. You can also return to the main view from the view by selecting Done .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 61 The view contains a list of video clips that you can Play , Send , Rename , and Delete . Create a quick muvee 1 In the Movie director main view, select Quick muvee . 2 Select a style for the muve e from the style list. The created muvee is saved in Movie director muvee list. The muvee is played automatically after saving. Tip! To download new styles to your device, select Style downlds. ( ) from the Movie director main view. Create a custom muvee 1 In the Movie Director main view, select Custom muvee . 2 Select the clips you want to include in your muvee in Video , Image , Style , or Music . After you have selected video clips and images, to define the order in which th e files are played in the muvee, select Options > Advanced options . Select the file you want to move by pr essing the scroll key. Then scroll to the file below wh ich you want to place the marked file, and press the scroll key. To cut the video clips, select Options > Select contents . See "Select content" , p. 61 . In Message you can add an opening and closing text to a muvee. 3 Select Create muvee . and from the following: Multimedia message âÂÂto optimise the length of the muvee for MMS sending. Auto-select âÂÂto include all the selected pictures and video clips in the muvee. Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee duration to be the same as the chosen music clip. User defined âÂÂto define the length of the muvee. 4 Select Options > Save . To preview the custom muvee before saving it, in the Preview muvee view, select Options > Play . To create a new custom muv ee by using the same style settings, select Options > Recreate . Select content After you select images and vi deo clips for your muvee, you can edit the selected video clips. Select Options > Advanced options > Options > Select contents . You can select which parts of the video clip you want to include or exclude in the muvee. A slid er below the video screen indicates the included, exclu ded, and neutralised parts with colours: green is for incl uded, red is for excluded, and grey is for neutral parts.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 62 To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scroll to the part, and select Options > Include . To exclude a part from the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Options > Exclude . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude a part of the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Options > Mark as neutral . To exclude a shot from the video clip, select Options > Exclude shot . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude parts of the video clip, select Options > Mark all as neutral . Settings Select Settings to edit the following options: Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your muvees. Resolution âÂÂSelect the resolution of your muvees. Default muvee name âÂÂSet a default name for the muvees.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 63 Messaging Press , and select Messaging . In Messaging , you can create, send, receive, view , edit, and organise text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, and special text messages cont aining data. You can also receive messages and data through a Bluetooth connection, receive Web service messages, cell broadcast messages, and send service commands. Note: Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. When you open Messaging , you can see the New message function and a list of folders: Inbox âÂÂContains received messa ges except e-mail and cell broadcast messages. E-ma il messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂFor organising your messages into folders. Mailbox âÂÂIn Mailbox you can connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e- mail messages or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. See "E-mail" , p. 76 . Drafts âÂÂStores draft messages that have not been sent. Sent âÂÂStores the last 20 messages that have been sent excluding messages sent using a Bluetooth connection. To change the number of messages to be saved, see "Other settings" , p. 78 . Outbox âÂÂA temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Reports ( )âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent. Receiv ing a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address might not be possible. Tip! When you have opened any of the default folders, you can switch between the folders by pressing or . To enter and send service re quests (also known as USSD commands), such as activa tion commands for network services, to your service provider, select Options > Service command in the main view of Messaging .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 64 Cell broadcast allows you to receive messages on various topics, such as weathe r or traffic conditions from your service provider. For av ailable topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your se rvice provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Options in Cell broadcast are Open , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Remove hotmark , Topic , Settings , Help , and Exit . Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packet data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Write text Traditional text input and indicate the selected case. means that the first letter of the word is written in uppercase, and all other letters are automati cally written in lowercase. indicates number mode. The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text us ing traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repe atedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. ⢠To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period ), and enter the letter. ⢠To erase a character, press . Press and hold to clear more than one character. ⢠The most common punctuation marks are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. Press to open a list of sp ecial characters. Use to move through the list, and press Select to select a character. ⢠To insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠To switch between the different character modes, press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 65 Predictive text inputâÂÂDictionary You can enter any lett e r w i t h a s i n g l e k e y p r e s s . P r e d i c t i v e text input is based on a built -in dictionary to which you can also add new words. When the dictionary becomes full, the latest added word replaces the oldest. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Dictionary on . This activates predictive text input for all editors in the phone. is shown on the top right of the display when you write text using predictive text input. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys â . Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to writ e âÂÂNokiaâ when the English dictionary is selected, press for N, for o, for k, for i, and for a. The word suggestion changes after each key press. 3 When you finish writing the wo rd and it is correct, to confirm it, press , or press to add a space. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words the dict ionary has found one by one, or press , and select Dictionary > Matches . If the ? character is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text input, and select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly. Tips on predictive text input To erase a character, press . Press and hold to clear more than one character. To change between the differ ent character modes, press . If you press quickly twice, pr edictive text input is turned off. Tip! Predictive text inpu t tries to guess which commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The order and availability of the punctuation marks depend on the language of the dictionary. To insert a number in lett er mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch between letter an d number mode, press and hold .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 66 The most common punctuation marks are available under . Press and then repeatedly to search for the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special characters. Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Press , select Dictionary , and press to select one of the following options: Matches âÂÂTo view a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Insert word âÂÂTo add a word to the dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. Edit word âÂÂTo edit the word using traditional text input. This is available if the wo rd is active (underlined). Tip! When you press , th e following options appear (depending on the editing mode): Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode , Cut (if text has been selected), Copy (if text has been selected), Paste (when text has been cut or copied first), Insert number , Insert symbol , and Writing language: (changes the input language for all editors in the phone). Write compound words Write the first half of a co mpound word; to confirm it, press . Write the last part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turn predictive text input off Press , and select Dictionary > Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the phone. Copy text to clipboard 1 To select letters and word s, press and hold . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted. 2 To copy the text to the cl ipboard, while still holding , select Copy . 3 To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste , or press once, and select Paste . To select lines of text, pr ess and hold . At the same time press or . To remove the selected text from the document, press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 67 Write and send messages The appearance of a multimedia message may vary, depending on the receiving device. Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Tip! You can start to crea te a message from any application that has the option Send . Select a file (image or text) to be a dded to the message, and select Options > Send . Before you can create a mult imedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See "Receive MMS and e-mail settings" , p. 68 and "E-mail" , p. 76 . The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. Text message âÂÂto send a text message. Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS). E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail. If yo u have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. 2 Press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. Tip! Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. 3 Press to move to the message field. 4 Write the message. 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . When sound is added, the icon is shown in the navigation bar. You cannot send video clips th at are saved in the .mp4 format in a multimedia messa ge. To change the format in which recorded videos are saved, see "Video settings" , p. 50 . 6 To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Insert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 68 Select Options > Preview to see what the multimedia message looks like. 7 To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Note . E-mail attachments are indicated by in the navigation bar. Tip! To send files other than sounds and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application, and select Send > Via e-mail , if available. 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press . Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Longer messages will be sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge a ccordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options like Chinese, take up more space limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. In the navigation ba r, you can see the message length indicator counting backwards. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. Note: E-mail messages are automatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in the Outbox with the Failed status. Tip! In Messaging you can also create presentations and send them in a multimedia message. In the multimedia message editor view, select Options > Create presentation (shown only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ). See "Multimedia messages" , p. 75 . Tip! When you send a mult imedia message to an e-mail address or a devi ce that supports the receiving of large images, use the larger image size. If you are not sure of the receiving device, or the network does not support se nding large files, it is recommended that you use a smaller image size or a sound clip that is no long er than 15 seconds. To change the setting, select Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Image size in the Messaging main view. Receive MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a text message from your network operator or service provider. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . For availability of and subs cription to data services, contact your network operator or service provider. Follow the instructions given by your service provider.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 69 Enter the MMS settings manually: 1 Select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points , and define the settings fo r a multimedia messaging access point. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 . 2 Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Access point in use and the access point you created to be used as the preferred connection. See also "Multimedia messages" , p. 75 . Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must do the following: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 . ⢠Define your e-mail sett ings correctly. See "E-mail" , p. 76 . You need to have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions give n by your remote mailbox and Internet servic e provider (ISP). InboxâÂÂreceive messages Inbox icons: âÂÂunread messages in Inbox ; âÂÂunread text message; âÂÂunread multimedia message; âÂÂdata received through a Bluetooth connection. When you receive a mess age, and the text 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. Select Show to open the message. To open a message in Inbox , scroll to it, and press . Multimedia messages Important: Excercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that you have received a multimedia message that is saved in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your phone, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message, and simultaneously listen to a sound through the loudspeaker ( is shown if sound is included). Click the arrow in th e icon to listen to the sound. To see what kinds of media ob jects have been included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Objects . You can choose to save a multimedia object file in your phone or send it, for example, through a Bluetooth connection to another compatible device. To view received multimedia presentations, select Options > Play presentation .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 70 Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Data and settings Your phone can receive many kinds of text messages that contain data ( ), also called over-the-air (OTA) messages: Configuration message âÂÂYou may receive a text message service number, voice mailbox number, Internet access point settings, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings from your network op erator, service provider, or company information management department in a configuration message. To save the settings, select Options > Save all . Business card âÂÂTo save the information to Contacts , select Options > Save business card . Certificates or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. Ringing tone âÂÂTo save the ringing tone, select Options > Save . Operator logo âÂÂFor the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options > Save . Calendar entry âÂÂTo save the invitation, select Options > Save to Calendar . Web message âÂÂTo save the bookmark to the bookmarks list in Web, select Options > Add to bookmarks . If the message contains both a ccess point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options > Save all . E-mail notification âÂÂTells you how many new e-mails you have in your remote mailbox . An extended notification may list more detailed information. Tip! If you receive a vCard file that has a picture attached, the picture is saved to contacts. Web service messages Web service messages ( ) are notifications (for example, news headlines) and may contai n a text message or a link. For availability and subscrip tion, contact your service provider. My folders In My folders , you can organise your messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Tip! You can use texts in the templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 71 Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. See "E-mail" , p. 76 . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose whether you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages and e-mail headings offline or co nnect to the e-mail server. When you scroll to your mailbox, and press , the phone asks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? . Select Yes to connect to your ma ilbox, and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages. When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a packet data connection. See also "Connection settings" , p. 108 . Select No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. When you view e-ma il messages offline, your phone is not connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail . New âÂÂto retrieve all new e-mail messages to your phone. Selected âÂÂto retrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2 After you have retrieved th e e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 72 E-mail status icons: New e-mail (offline or online mode): the content has not been retrieved to your phone. New e-mail: the content has been retrieved to your phone. The e-mail message has been read. The e-mail heading has be en read and the message content has been de leted from the phone. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrie ved (arrow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open a message that has the attachment indicator , and select Options > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieve d to the phone; select Options > Retrieve . In the Attachments view, you can retrieve, open, save, or remove attachments. You can also send attachments using a Bluetooth connection. Tip! If your mailbox uses the IMAP4 protocol, you can define how many mess ages to retrieve, and whether to retrieve the attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are Headers only , Partially (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. . Retrieve e-mail messages automatically To retrieve messages automatically, select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic retrieval > Header retrieval . Select Always on , or Only in home net. , and define when, and how often, the messages are retrieved. Retrieving e-mail messages automatically may increase your call costs due to the data traffic. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the phone while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone only . The phone mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your phone. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. Tip! T o c o p y a n e - m a i l f r o m t h e r e m o t e m a i l b o x t o a folder under My folders , select Options > Copy to folder , a folder from the list, and OK .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 73 To delete an e-mail from the phone and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone and server . If you are offline, the e-mail is deleted first from your phone. During the next connec tion to the remote mailbox, it is automatically deleted fr om the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only af ter you have closed the connection to the remote mailbox. To cancel deleting an e-ma il from the phone and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connec tion ( ), and select Options > Undelete . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, select Options > Disconnect to end the packet data connection to the remote mailbox. Tip! You can also leave your mailbox connection open and the new e-mails ( Headers only as default) will be retrieved from the remote mailbox to your phone automatically (only if the IMAP IDLE function is supported by your server ). To leave the messaging application open in the ba ckground, press twice. Leaving the connection open may increase your call costs due to the data traffic. View e-mail messages when offline When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read the e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? query. You can read the previously retrieved e-mail he adings, the retrieved e-mail messages, or both. You can also write new, reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox are: Sending âÂÂA connection is being made and the message is being sent. Waiting / Queued âÂÂThe message will be sent when previous messages of a similar type have been sent. Resend at (time)âÂÂThe phone will try to send the message again after a time-out period. Select Send to restart the sending immediately. Deferred â Y o u c a n s e t d o c u m e n t s t o b e o n h o l d w h i l e t h e y are in Outbox . Scroll to a message th at is being sent, and select Options > Defer sending .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 74 Failed âÂÂThe maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has fail ed. If you were trying to send a text message, open the message, and check that the Sending options are correct. Example: Messages are placed in the outbox, for example, when your phone is outside network coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time yo u connect to your remote mailbox. View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and OK to start copying. Open the folder to view the messages. Messaging settings Text messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message . Message centres âÂÂLists all the text message centres that have been defined. Msg. centre in use âÂÂSelect which message centre is used for delivering text messages. Receive report ( )âÂÂTo request the network to send delivery reports on your messages. When set to No , only the Sent status is shown in the log. See "Log" , p. 35 . Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, the message is removed from the text message centre . The network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Message sent as âÂÂChange this option only if you are sure that your message centre is ab le to convert text messages into these other formats. Co ntact your network operator. Preferred connection âÂÂYou can send text messages through the normal GSM network or through packet data, if supported by the network. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 75 Reply via same ctr. ( )âÂÂChoose Yes , if you want the reply message to be sent us ing the same text message centre number. Add a new text message centre 1 Select Message centres > Options > New msg. centre . 2 Press , write a name for the message centre, and select OK . 3 Press and , and write the number of the text message centre. You receive the number from your service provider. 4 Select OK . 5 To use the new settings, go back to the settings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , and select the new message centre. Multimedia messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. The options are Original (shown only when the MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ), Small , and Large . Select Original to increase the size of the multimedia message. MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Guided , the phone informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted ; the phone prevents you from se nding messages that are not supported. Access point in use ( Must be defined )âÂÂSelect which access point is used as the preferred connection for the multimedia message centre. Multimedia retrieval âÂÂSelect how you want to receive multimedia messages. To receive multimedia messages automatically in your home network, select Aut. in home network . Outside your home network, you receive a notification that you have re ceived a multimedia message that is saved in the multimedia message centre. You can select if you want to retrie ve the message to your phone. When you are outside your home network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic , your phone automatically make s an active packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home network. Allow anon. messages âÂÂSelect No if you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report ( )âÂÂSelect Yes if you want the status of the sent message to be show n in the log. Receiving a
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 76 delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address might not be possible. Deny report sending âÂÂSelect Yes if you do not want your phone to send delivery report s of received multimedia messages. Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allo wed by the network. Tip! You may also obtain the multimedia and e-mail settings from your service provider through a configuration message. Contact your service provider for more information. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . E-mail Select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail , or in the mailbox main view, select Options > E-mail settings , and select from the following: Mailbox in use âÂÂSelect which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes âÂÂOpens a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes ha ve been defined, you are prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to change the following settings: Mailbox settings , User settings , and Automatic retrieval . Mailbox settings : Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the mailbox. Access point in use ( Must be defined )âÂÂChoose an Internet access point (IAP) for the mailbox. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 . My e-mail address ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. Outgoing mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your network operator. Contac t your service provider for more information. User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password: âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the ma il server that receives your e-mail.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 77 Mailbox type: âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provid er recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you are using the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. To see the la test e-mail messages, you must disconnect and make a new connection to your mailbox. Security (ports) âÂÂUsed with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. APOP secure login (not shown if IMAP 4 is selected for Mailbox type )âÂÂUsed with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. User settings : Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your phone. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select When conn. avail. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. E-mails to retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂDefine how many new e-mails are retrieved to the mailbox. Retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to IMAP4)âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mails are retrieved: Headers only , Partially (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. Retrieve attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂChoose whether you want to retrieve e-mail with or without attachments. Subscribed folders (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂYou can subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. Send copy to self âÂÂSelect Yes to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail address . Include signature âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. My name âÂÂEnter your own name here. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs phone when the recipientâÂÂs phone supports this function. Automatic retrieval : Header retrieval âÂÂWhen this function is on, messages are retrieved automatically. Yo u can define when, and how often, the messages are retrieved. Activating Header retrieval may increase your call costs due to the data traffic.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 78 Web service messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . Choose whether you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the phone to automatically activate the browser and star t a network connection to retrieve content when the phone receives a service message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics an d related topic numbers with your service provider, and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast to change the settings. Reception âÂÂChoose whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language â All allows you to receive cell broadcast messages in all supported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which language s you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If you cannot find the desired language, select Other . Topic detection âÂÂIf you have set Topic detection > On , the phone automatically search es for new topic numbers, and saves the new numbers wi thout a name to the topic list. Select Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically. Other settings Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Other . Save sent messages âÂÂChoose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent folder. No. of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is re ached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂChoose the memory where you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . Tip! If Memory card is selected, activate the offline profile before opening the memory card slot door or removing the memory card. When the memory card is not available, messages are saved in the phone memory. New e-mail alerts âÂÂChoose whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications, a tone or a note, when new mail is received to the mailbox.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar 79 Calendar Shortcut: Press any key ( â ) in any calendar view. A meeting entry opens, and the characters you enter are added to the Subject field. Tip! Regularly back up the phone information to the memory card. You can restor e the information, such as calendar entries, to the phone later. See "Memory card tool" , p. 18 . Create calendar entries 1 Press , and select Calendar > Options > New entry and from the following: Meeting âÂÂTo remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. Memo âÂÂTo write a general entry for a day. Anniversary âÂÂTo remind you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. 2 Fill in the fields. Use to move between fields. Alarm (meetings and anniversaries)âÂÂSelect On , and press to fill in the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. in the day view indicates an alarm. Repeat âÂÂPress to change the entry to be repeating ( is shown in the day view). Repeat until âÂÂYou can set an end date for the repeated entry. Synchronisation : Private âÂÂafter synchronisation the calendar entry can be seen only by you and it will not be shown to others with online access to view the calendar. Public âÂÂThe calendar entry is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None âÂÂThe calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you synchronise. 3 To save the entry, select Done . To stop a calendar alarm, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The remind er text stays on the screen. Select Stop to end the calendar alarm. Select Snooze to set the alarm to snooze.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar 80 Tip! To send a calendar note to a compatible phone, select Options > Send > Via text message , Via multimedia , or Via Bluetooth . Tip! You can move calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your phone or synchronise your calendar and to-do to a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. Set a calendar alarm You can set an alarm to re mind you of meetings and anniversaries. 1 Open an entry in which you want to set an alarm, and select Alarm > On . 2 Set the Alarm time and Alarm date . 3 Scroll down to Repeat , and press to select how often you want the alarm to be repeated. 4 Select Done . To delete a calendar alarm, open the entry in which you want to delete an alarm, and select Alarm > Off . Calendar views Tip! Select Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. In the month view, dates that have calendar entries are marked with a small triangle at the right bottom corner. In the week view, memos and anni versaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Press to switch between the month view, the week view, and the day view. Icons in the day and week views: Memo Anniversary There is no icon for Meeting . To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date , write the date, and select OK . Press to jump to today. Remove calendar entries Removing past entries in Calendar saves space in your phone memory. To remove more than one even t at a time, go to the month view, and select Options > Delete entry and one of the following:
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar 81 Before date âÂÂDeletes all calendar en tries that take place before a certain date you define. All entries âÂÂDeletes all calendar entries. Calendar settings To modify the Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week starts on , and Week view title , select Options > Settings .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 82 Web Various service providers maintain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. To access these pages, press , and select Web . These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or hypertext ma rkup language (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator or service provider. Service providers will also give you in structions on how to use their services. Shortcut: To start a connection, press and hold in the standby mode. Access the Web ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the Web page that you want to use. See the sections "Receive browser settings" , p. 82 or "Enter the settings manually" , p. 82 . ⢠Make a connection to the Web. See "Make a connection" , p. 83 . ⢠Start browsing the pages. See "Browse" , p. 84 . ⢠End the connection to the Web. See "End a connection" , p. 86 . Receive browser settings Tip! Settings may be availabl e on the Web site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive Web service settings in a special text message from the network ope rator or service provider that offers the Web page. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . For more information, contac t your network operator or service provider. Enter the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. 1 Press and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points , and define the settings for an access point. See "Connection settings", p. 108 . 2 Select Web > Options > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the page defined for the current access point. 3 To set the created access point as the default access point in Web , select Web > Options > Settings > Access point .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 83 Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consists of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the Web page requires, a user name and password. Options in the bookmarks view are Open / Download , Bookmark manager , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Tools , Advanced options , Send , Find bookmark , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . Your device may have some b ookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for securi ty or content, as you would with any Internet site. Icons in the bookmark view: The starting page defined for the default access point. If you use another defaul t access point for browsing, the starting page is changed accordingly. The automatic bookmarks fo lder contains bookmarks ( ) that are collected auto matically when you browse pages. The bookmarks in this folder are automatically organised according to domain. Any bookmark showing the ti tle or Internet address of the bookmark. Add bookmarks manually 1 In the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . 2 Start to fill in the fields. On ly the URL address must be defined. The default access point is assigned to the bookmark if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. 3 Select Options > Save to save the bookmark. Send bookmarks Scroll to a bookmark, and select Options > Send > Via text message . Press to send. It is po ssible to send more than one bookmark at the same time. Make a connection Once you have stored all the required connection settings, you can access the pages. 1 Select a bookmark or enter th e address in the field ( ). When you enter the address, matching bookmarks are shown above the field. Pre ss to select a matching bookmark. 2 Press to start to download the page.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 84 Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the Internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does no t indicate that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (or place where the requested re source is stored) is secure. The service provider secure s the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Select Options > Details > Security to view details about the connection, encryptions st atus, and information about server and user authentication. Security features may be requ ired for some services, such as banking services. For su ch connections you need security certificates. For more information, contact your service provider. See also "Certificate management" , p. 112 . Browse I mportant: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate securi ty and protection against harmful software. Options when browsing (d epending on the page you are viewing) are Open , Accept , Remove file , Open in viewer , Service options , Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , Navigation options , Tools , Advanced options , Show images , Send bookmark , Find , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. To open a link, to check boxes, and make selections, press . Shortcut: Use to jump to the end of a page and to the beginning of a page. To go to the previous pa ge while browsing, select Back . If Back is not available, select Options > Navigation options > History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a browsing session. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. To retrieve the latest cont ent from the server, select Options > Navigation options > Reload . To save a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . Tip! To access the bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . To return to the browser view again, select Options > Back to page .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 85 To save a page while browsing, select Options > Advanced options > Save page . You can save pages either to the phone memory or on a memo ry card, and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, press in the bookmarks view to open the Saved pages view. To enter a new URL address, select Options > Navigation options > Go to web address . To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options . You can download files that cannot be shown on the browser page, such as ring ing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Downloaded items are handled by the respective app lications in your phone, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Gallery . Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Tip! Your browser collects bookmarks automatically while you are browsing We b pages. The bookmarks are stored to the automatic bookmarks folder ( ) and automatically organised according to domain. See also "Web settings" , p. 86 . View saved pages If you regularly browse pages containing information that does not change very often, you can save and browse them when offline. In the saved pa ges view you can also create folders to store your saved browser pages. Options in the saved pages view are Open , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced options , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . To open the saved pages view , press in the bookmarks view. In the saved pages vi ew, press to open a saved page ( ). To save a page while browsing, select Options > Advanced options > Save page . To start a connection to the browser service and to download the latest version of the page, select Options > Reload . The phone stays online after you reload the page. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and vide o clips. These items can be provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respec tive applications in your
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 86 phone, for example, a downlo aded photo can be saved in Gallery . Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. 1 To download the item, scroll to the link, and press . 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ. 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept. To cancel the download, select Cancel . Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. End a connection Select Options > Advanced options > Disconnect to end the connection and view the browser page offline, or Options > Exit to end the connection and close the browser. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the phone. A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requ iring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have accessed is stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Advanced options > Clear cache . Web settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Access point âÂÂTo change the default access point, press to open a list of av ailable access points. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 . Show images âÂÂTo select if you want to load images while browsing or not. If you select No , to load images later during browsing, select Options > Show images. Font size âÂÂTo choose the text size. Default encoding âÂÂIf text characte rs are not shown correctly, you may choose another encoding according to language. Automatic bookmarks âÂÂTo disable automatic bookmark collecting, select Off . If you want to continue collecting automatic bookmarks but hi de the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 87 Screen size âÂÂTo select what is shown when you are browsing. Select Select. keys only or Full screen . Homepage âÂÂTo define the home page. Search page âÂÂTo define a Web page that is downloaded when you select Navigation options > Open search page in the bookmarks view, or when browsing. Volume âÂÂIf you want the browser to play sounds embedded on Web pages, select a volume level. Rendering âÂÂIf you want the page layout shown as accurately as po ssible when in Small screen mode, select By quality . If you do not want external cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Cookies âÂÂTo enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Glossary: Cookies are a means of content providers to identify users and thei r preferences for frequently used content. Java/ECMA script âÂÂTo enable or disable the use of scripts. Security warnings âÂÂTo hide or show security notifications. Serial no. sending âÂÂTo enable or disable serial number sending. Some service providers may require that you enable this function before Web browsing is possible. Conf. DTMF sending âÂÂChoose whether you want to confirm before the phone send s DTMF tones during a voice call. See also "Options during a voice call" , p. 34 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office 88 Office Calculator To add, substract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages, press , and select Office > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To save a number in th e memory (indicated by M ), select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve a number in memory, select Options > Memory > Recall . To clear a number in memory, select Options > Memory > Clear . Calculate percentages 1 Enter a number for which you want to calculate a percentage. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Enter the percentage. 4 Select . Converter To convert measures such as Length from one unit ( Yards ) to another ( Metres ), press , and select Office > Converter . Options in Converter are Select unit / Change currency , Conversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . Note that Converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 Scroll to the Type field, and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the meas ure you want to use, and select OK . 2 Scroll to the first Unit field, and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert and OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select th e unit to which you want to convert. 3 Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office 89 Press to add a decimal and for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols. Tip! To change the conver sion order, enter the value in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the first Amount field. Set base currency and exchange rates Before you can make currency conversions, you need to choose a base currency and ad d exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is alwa ys 1. The base currency determines the conversion ra tes of the other currencies. 1 Select Converter > Options > Currency rates . A list of currencies opens, and you can see the current base currency at the top. Tip! To rename a currency, go to the currency rates view, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Rename currency . 2 To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base curr. . 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the currency, and enter a new rate, that is, how many units of the currency equal one unit of the base cu rrency you have selected. After you have inserted all th e necessary exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates beca use all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. To-do Create a task list Press , and select Office > To-do to write notes and maintain a task list. To add a note, press any key to start to write the task in the Subject field. To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field, and enter a date. To set the priority for the To-do note, scroll to the Priority field, and press to select the priority. The priority icons are ( High ) and ( Low ). There is no icon for Normal . To mark a task as comple ted, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as done . To restore a task, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as not done .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office 90 Notes Press , and select Office > Notes to write notes. You can send notes to other compatible devices and save plain text files (.txt format) that you receive to Notes . Recorder Press , and select Office > Recorder to record telephone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone conversation, both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 91 My own Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts Default shortcuts: Opens Calendar Opens Inbox Opens Notes To store shortcuts (links to your favourite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on), press , and select My own > Go to . Shortcuts are added only from the individual applications, for example, Gallery . Not all applications have this function. 1 Select an item from an a pplication to which you want to add a shortcut. 2 Select Add to 'Go to' . A shortcut in Go to is automatically updated if you move the item to which it is pointing (for example, fro m one folder to another). To change the identifier in the lower left corner of the shortcut icon, select Options > Shortcut icon . Delete a shortcut Select the shortcut, and pr ess . The default shortcuts Notes , Calendar , and Inbox cannot be deleted. When you remove an application or a document which has a shortcut in Go to , the shortcut icon of the removed item is dimmed in the Go to view. The shortcut can be deleted next time you start Go to . IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) Press , and select My own > IM . Instant messaging allows yo u to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topi cs. Various service providers maintain IM servers that you can log in to once you have registered to an IM service. Options in the IM main view are Open , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Select Conversations to start or continue a conversation with an IM user; IM contacts to create, edit, or view the online status of your IM contacts; IM groups to start or continue a group conversation with multiple IM users; or Recorded chats to view a previous instant messaging session that you have saved.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 92 Note: Check the availability of chat services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/ or service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Receive IM settings You must save the settings to access the service that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network oper ator or service provider that offers the IM service. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . You can also enter the settings manually. See "Chat server settings" , p. 96 . Connect to an IM server Tip: To log in automatically when you start IM , select Options > Settings > Server settings > IM login type > On app. start-up . 1 Open IM to have your phone connect to the IM server i n u s e . T o c h a n g e t h e I M s e r v e r i n u s e a n d s a v e n e w I M servers, see "Chat server settings" ,p . 96 . 2 Enter your user ID and pa ssword, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and password for the IM server from your service provider. You can select Cancel to stay offline; to log in to the IM server later, select Options > Login . You cannot send or receive messages while you are offline. 3 To log out, select Options > Logout . Modify your IM settings Select Options > Settings > IM settings : Use screen name (shown only if IM groups are supported by the server)âÂÂTo enter a nickname, select Yes . IM presence âÂÂTo allow others to see if you are online, select Active for all . Allow messages from âÂÂTo allow messages from all, select All . Allow invitations from âÂÂTo allow invitations only from your IM contacts, select IM contacts only . IM invitations a r e s e n t b y I M c on t a c t s w h o wa nt you to join their groups. Msg. scrolling speed âÂÂTo select the speed at which new messages are displayed. Sort IM contacts âÂÂTo sort your IM contacts Alphabetically or By online status . Availability reloading âÂÂTo choose how to update information about whether your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automatic or Manual .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 93 Search for IM groups and users To search for groups, in the IM groups view, select Options > Search . You can search by Group name , Topic, and Members (user ID). To search for users, in the IM contacts view, select Options > New IM contact > Search from server . You can search by User's name , User ID, Phone number , and E-mail address . Join and leave an IM group To join an IM group that yo u have saved, scroll to the group, and press . To join an IM group not on th e list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join new group . Enter the group ID, and press . To leave the IM group, select Options > Leave IM group . Chat Once you have joined an IM group, you can view the messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. Options while chatting are Send , Send private msg. , Reply , Forward , Insert smiley , Send invitation , Leave IM group , Group , Record chat /Stop recording , Help , and Exit . To send a message, write th e message in the message editor field, and press . To send a private message to a participant, select Options > Send private msg. , select the recipient, write the message, and press . To reply to a private message sent to you, select the message, and select Options > Reply . To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM group, select Options > Send invitation , select the contacts you want to invite, write the invitation message, and press . To prevent receiving messages from certain participants, select Options > Blocking options , and select from the following: Add to blocked list âÂÂTo block messages from the currently selected participant. Add ID to list manually âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the participant. Enter the ID, and press . View blocked list âÂÂTo see the participants whose messages are being blocked. Unblock âÂÂTo select the user that you want to remove from the blocked list. Press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 94 Record chats Options in the recorded chats view are Open , Delete , Send , Mark/Unmark , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . To record to a file the messa ges that are exchanged during a conversation or while you are joined in a IM group, select Options > Record chat , enter a name for the conversation file, and press . To stop recording, select Options > Stop recording . The recorded conversation file s are automatically saved in Recorded chats . To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats , select the conversation, and press . View and start conversations Go to the Conversations view to see a list of the individual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversation with. To view a conversation, scroll to a participant, and press . Options when viewing a conversation are Send , Add to IM contacts , Insert smiley , Forward , Record chat / Stop recording , Blocking options , End conversation , Help , and Exit . To continue the conversati on, write your message, and press . To return to the conversati ons list without closing the conversation, select Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you exit IM . To start a new conversation, select Options > New conversation : Select recipient âÂÂTo see a list of your chat contacts that are currently online. Scroll to the contact that you want to start a conversation with, and press . Glossary: The user ID is provided by the service provider to those who register to this service. Enter user ID âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the user you want to start a conversation with, and press . To save a conversation partic ipant to your IM contacts, scroll to the partic ipant, and select Options > Add to IM contacts . To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Options > Set auto reply on . Enter the text, and select Done . You can still receive messages.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 95 IM contacts Go to the IM contacts to retrieve chat contact lists from the server, or to add a new ch at contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server, the previously used chat contact list is retrieved fro m the server automatically. Options in the IM contacts view are Open conversation , Contact details , Change contact list , Reload users availability , Belongs to groups , New IM contact , Move to other list , Edit , Delete , Switch tracking on , Blocking options , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . To create a new contact, select Options > New IM contact > Enter manually . Fill in the Nickname and User ID fields, and select Done . To move a contact from a list on the server to the retrieved list, select Options > New IM contact > Move from other list . To change the chat contact list, select Options > Change contact list . Select from the following options: Open conversation âÂÂTo start a new conversation or continue an ongoing conver sation with the contact. Switch tracking on âÂÂTo have the phone notify you every time the chat contact goes online or offline. Belongs to groups âÂÂTo see which groups the chat contact has joined. Reload users availability âÂÂTo update information about whether the contact is online or offline. The online status is shown by an indicator next to the contact name. This option is not availabl e if you have set the Availability reloading to Automatic in IM settings . Manage IM groups Options in the IM groups view are Open , Join new group , Create new group , Leave IM group , Group , Search , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Go to the IM groups view to see a list of the IM groups that you have either saved or are currently joined to. Scroll to a group, select Options > Group and one of the following: Save âÂÂTo save an unsaved group that you are currently joined to. Delete âÂÂTo delete a saved or created group that you are currently not joined to. View participants âÂÂTo see who are currently joined to the group.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 96 Details âÂÂTo see the group ID, topic, participants, administrators of the group (s hown only if you have the editing rights), the list of bl ocked participants (shown only if you have the editing ri ghts), and whether private conversations are allowed in the group. Settings âÂÂTo view and edit the ch at group settings. See "Create a new IM group" , p. 96 . Administrate an IM group Create a new IM group Select IM groups > Options > Create new group . Enter the settings for the group. You can edit the settings fo r an IM group if you have administrator rights to the gr oup. The user who creates a group is automatically given administrator rights to it. Group name , Group topic , and Welcome note âÂÂTo add details that the participants se e when they join the group. Group size âÂÂTo define the maximum number of members allowed to join the group. Allow search âÂÂTo define if others ca n find the chat group by searching. Editing rights âÂÂTo define the chat group participants to whom you want to give rights to invite contacts to join the IM group and edit the group settings. Group members âÂÂSee "Add and remove group members" , p. 96 . Banned list âÂÂEnter the participants that are not allowed to join the IM group. Allow private msgs. âÂÂTo allow messaging between selected participants only. Group ID âÂÂThe group ID is created automatically and cannot be changed. Add and remove group members To add members to a group, select IM groups , scroll to an IM group, and select Options > Group > Settings > Group members > Selected only or All . To remove a member from th e IM group, scroll to the member, and select Options > Remove . To remove all members, select Options > Remove all . Chat server settings Select Options > Settings > Server settings . You may receive the settings in a sp ecial text message from the network operator or service provider that offers the chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from your service provider when you register to the service. If you do not know your user ID or pa ssword, contact your service provider.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 97 To change the IM server to which you wish to connect, select Default server . To add a new server to your list of IM servers, select Servers > Options > New server . Enter the following settings: Server name âÂÂEnter the name for the chat server. Access point in use âÂÂSelect the access point you want to use for the server. Web address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the IM server. User ID âÂÂEnter your user ID. Password âÂÂEnter your login password.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 98 Connectivity Bluetooth connection You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with Bluetooth technology. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, comp uters, and enhancements such as headsets and car kits. You can use Bluetooth technology to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; to connect wirelessly to your compatible PC to, for example, transfer files; or to connect to a compatible printer to print images with Image print . See "Image print" , p. 57 . Since devices with Bluetoot h technology communicate using radio waves, your device and the other device do not need to be in direct line-o f-sight. The two devices only need to be within 10 metres of each other, although the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 1.2 supporting the following profil es: Basic Printing Profile, Generic Access Profile, Serial Port Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Headset Profile, Handsfree Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile , Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, Basic Im aging Profile, and Human Interface Device Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices suppor ting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of othe r devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Glossary: A profile corresponds to a service or a function, and defines how different devices connect. For example the Handsfree Profile is used between the handsfree device and th e phone. For devices to be compatible, they must support the same profiles. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth tech nology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use the Bluetooth connection. See "Security" , p. 111 for more information on locking the device.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 99 Bluetooth connection settings Press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. Select from the following: Bluetooth âÂÂSet to On or Off . To connect wirelessly to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth On , and then establish a connection. My phone's visibility âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetooth technology, select Shown to all . To hide it from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name âÂÂEdit the name of your device. After you have set a Bluetoot h connection and changed My phone's visibility to Shown to all , your device and this name can be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth technology. Security tips When you are not using Bl uetooth, set Bluetooth Off , or select My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. Send data using a Bluetooth connection There can be several active Bluetooth connections at a time. For example, if you are connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to anot her compatible device at the same time. Bluetooth connection indicators ⢠When is shown in the standby mode, a Bluetooth connection is active. ⢠When is blinking, your de vice is trying to connect to the other device. ⢠When is shown conti nuously, the Bluetooth connection is active. Tip! To send text using a Bluetooth connection (instead of text messages), open Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . 1 Open an application where th e item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item, for example an image, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth technology that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. You can see a device icon, the name of the device, the device type, or a short name.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 100 Tip! If you have searched for devices earlier, a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devices . If you switch off the phone, the list is cleared. Device icons: âÂÂComputer; âÂÂPhone; âÂÂAudio or video; âÂÂHeadset; âÂÂOther. To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes. 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair devices" , p. 100 . 5 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. The Sent folder in Messaging does not store messages sent using a Bluetooth connection. Tip! When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique addr esses (device addresses). To find the unique address of your phone, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices Glossary: Pairing means authentication. The users of the two devices with Bluetooth technology should agree on a common passcod e, and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. In the Bluetooth main view, press to open the paired devices view ( ). Before pairing, create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. The passcode is used only once. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices with Bluetooth techno logy that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as well. After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices view. Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. Tip! To define a short name (nickname or alias) for a paired device, scroll to the device, and select Options > Assign short name in the paired devices view. This name helps you to recognise a certain device during device search or when a device requests a connection.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 101 To set a device to be authorised or unauthorised, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Tip! If you are currently co nnected to a device and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately and the connection will be switched off. Receive data using a Bluetooth connection When you receive data using a Bluetooth connection, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . Messages received using a Bluetooth co nnection are indicated by . See "InboxâÂÂreceive messages" , p. 69 . Switch off Bluetooth connectivity To switch off Bluetoot h connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off . PC connections You can use your device with a variety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia PC Suite you can, for example, synchronise contacts, calendar and To-do notes, and transfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from the PC to synchronise with your device. For further information on ho w to install No kia PC Suite (compatible with Windows 200 0 and Windows XP), see the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite and the Nokia PC Suite help in the âÂÂInstallâ section on the CD-ROM.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 102 CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch after you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of a compatib le PC. If not, proceed as follows: Open Windows Explor er, right-click the CD-ROM drive where you inserted the CD-ROM, and select Autoplay. Your device as a modem You can use your device as a modem to send and receive e-mail, or to connect to the In ternet with a compatible PC by using a Bluetooth connection or a data cable. Detailed installation instructions can be found in the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite in Modem options on the CD-ROM. Tip! When using Nokia PC Suite for the first time, to connect your device to a compatible PC and to use Nokia PC Suite, use th e Get Connected wizard available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Connection manager You may have multiple data connections active at the same time when you are usin g your device in GSM and UMTS networks. Press , and select Connect. > Conn. mgr. to view the status of multiple data connections, view details on the amount of data sent and received, and end connections. When you open Conn. mgr. , you can see the following: ⢠Open data connections: data calls ( ) and packet data c o n n e c t i o n s () o r () . ⢠The status of each connection ⢠The amount of data uploaded and downloaded for each connection (shown for packet data connections only) ⢠The duration of each connec tion (shown for data calls only) Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To end a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Disconnect . To close all currently op en connections, select Options > Disconnect all . View data connection details Options in the Conn. mgr. main view when there are one or more connections are Details , Disconnect , Disconnect all , Help , and Exit .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 103 To view the details of a conne ction, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Details . Name âÂÂThe name of the Internet access point (IAP) in use, or the modem connection name if the connection is a dial-up connection. Bearer âÂÂThe type of data connection: Data call , High sp. GSM , or Packet data . Status âÂÂThe current status of the connection: Connecting , Conn.(inact.) , Conn.(active) , On hold , Disconnctng. , or Disconnected . Received âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, received to your device. Sent âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, sent from your device. Duration âÂÂThe length of time that the connection has been open. Speed âÂÂThe current speed of both sending and receiving data in kilobytes per second. Dial-up âÂÂThe dial-up number used. Name âÂÂAccess point name used. Shared (not shown if the connection is not shared)âÂÂThe number of applications us ing the same connection. Remote synchronisation Press , and select Connect. > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, ca lendar, and contacts with various calendar and addres s book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. The synchronisation applicatio n uses SyncML technology for synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your phone data with. You may receive syncronisation settings in a special text message. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . Create a new synchronisation profile Options in the Sync main view are Synchronise , New sync profile , Edit sync profile , Delete , View log , Set as default , Help , and Exit . 1 If no profiles have been defined, your device asks if you want to create a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addition to existing ones, select Options > New sync profile . Choose whether you want to use the default setting values or copy the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 104 2 Define the following: Sync profile name âÂÂWrite a descriptive name for the profile. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the connection type: Web , or Bluetooth . Access point (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect an access poin t to use for the data connection. Host address âÂÂThe IP address of the host server. Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Port (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )â Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. User name âÂÂYour user ID for the synchronisation server. Contact your service provider or system administrator for your correct ID. Password âÂÂWrite your password. Contact your service provider or system administ rator for the correct value. Allow sync requests âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to allow the server to start a synchronisation. Accept all sync reqs. âÂÂSelect No if you want your device to ask you before a synchronisation initialised by the server is started. Network authentic. (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect Yes to enter a networ k user name and password. Press to view the user name and password fields. Press to select Contacts , Calendar , or Notes . ⢠Select Yes if you want to synchronise the selected database. ⢠In Remote database , enter a correct path to the remote calendar, address book, or notes database on the server. ⢠Select Synchronisation type : Normal (two-way synchronisation), To server only , or To phone only . 3 Select Back to save the settings and return to the main view. Synchronise data In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronisation profiles and the kind of data to be synchronised. 1 Select a synchronisation profile and Options > Synchronise . The status of the synchronisation is shown at the bottom of the screen. To cancel synchronisation be fore it finishes, select Cancel .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 105 2 You are notified when the sy nchronisation is complete. After synchronisation is complete, select Options > View log to open a log file showing the synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries, or notes have been added, updated, deleted, or discar ded (not synchronised) in your device or on the server. Device manager Press , and select Connect. > Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your network operator, service provider, or company information management department. These configuration settings may include access point settings for data connections and other sett ings used by different applications in your device. To connect to a server and re ceive configuration settings for your device, scroll to a profile, and select Options > Start configuration . To allow or deny receiving of configuration settings from service providers, select Options > Enable config. or Disable config. . Server profile settings Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Server name âÂÂEnter a name for the configuration server. Server ID âÂÂEnter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server password âÂÂEnter a password to identify your device to the server. Access point âÂÂSelect an access point to be used when connecting to the server. Host address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the server. Port âÂÂEnter the port number of the server. User name and Password âÂÂEnter your user name and password. Allow configuration âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from the server, select Yes . Auto-accept all reqs. âÂÂIf you want your device to ask for confirmation before acceptin g a configuration from the server, select No .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 106 Tools Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to a setting group, and press to open it. Scroll to a setting you want to change, and press . Phone settings General Phone language âÂÂChanging the language of the display texts in your phone also affe cts the format used for date and time and the separato rs used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the phone restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your phone, and the change remains effective unti l you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters and special charac ters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Dictionary âÂÂYou can set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the ph one. The predictive text dictionary is not ava ilable for all languages. Welcome note or logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the phone. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select a photo or picture from Gallery . Orig. phone settings âÂÂYou can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See "Security" , "Phone and SIM" , p. 112 . After resetting, the phone may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applications in the standby mode on the main display. See "Active standby mode" , p. 24 . Left selection key âÂÂTo assign a shortcut to the left selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list. Right selection key âÂÂTo assign a shortcut to the right selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 107 Active standby apps. âÂÂTo select the application shortcuts you want to appear in the acti ve standby. This setting is only available if Active standby is on. You can also assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key, by selecting an application from the list. The scroll key shortc uts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is visible only if you have received and saved an operator logo. You can choose if you want the operator logo to show or not. Display Brightness âÂÂYou can adjust the basic brightness level of the main display to lighter or darker. However, in extreme light conditions, the brig htness of the display is automatically adjusted. Power saver time-out âÂÂThe power saver on the main display is activated when the timeout period is over. Light time-out âÂÂSelect a time-out after which the backlight of the main display is switched off. Call settings Send my caller ID ( )âÂÂYou can set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your network operator or service provider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ). Call waiting ( )âÂÂIf you have activated call waiting, the network notifies you of a ne w incoming call while you have a call in progress. Select Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the network to deactivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a caller informing why yo u could not answer the call. See "Answer or reject a call" , p. 32 . Message text âÂÂWrite a text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Image in video call âÂÂYou can deny video sending when you receive a video call. Select a still image to be displayed instead of video.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 108 Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your phone makes a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialling, press . Summary after call âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the phone to briefly display the approximate duration of the last call. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialling keys ( - ) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See also "Speed dial a phone number" , p. 27 . Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pres sing any keypad key, except , , , and . Line in use ( )âÂÂThis setting is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages . Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make ca lls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip! To switch between th e phone lines, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change ( )âÂÂTo prevent line selection, select Line change > Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection settings Data connections and access points Your phone supports packet da ta connections ( ), such as GPRS in the GSM network. Glossary: General packet radio service (GPRS) uses packet data technology where information is sent in short packets of data ov er the mobile network. To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define different kind s of access points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Access point for the Web a pplication to view WML or XHTML pages ⢠Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you wish to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your network operator or service provider.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 109 Packet data connections in GSM and UMTS networks When you use your phone in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time and access points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connecti ons remain active during voice calls. To check the acti ve data connections, see "Connection manager" , p. 102 . The following indicators may be displayed below the signal indicator, depending on which network you use: GSM network, packet data is available in the network. GSM network, packet data co nnection is active, data is being transferred. GSM network, multiple pa cket data connections are active. GSM network, packet data connection is on hold. (This can happen during a voice call, for example.) UMTS network, packet data is available in the network. UMTS network, packet data connection is active, data is being transferred. UMTS network, multiple packet data connections are active. UMTS network, packet data connection is on hold. Receive access point settings You may receive access point settings in a text message from a service provider, or you may have preset access point settings in your phone. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . To create a new access point, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . An access point may be prot ected ( ) by your network operator or service provider. Protected access points cannot be edited or deleted. Access points Tip! See also "Receive MMS and e-mail settings" , p. 68 , "E-mail" , p. 76 , and "Access the Web" , p. 82 . Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. Connection name âÂÂGive a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂDepending on what data connection you select, only certain setting fiel ds are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data connection, the network service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 110 Access point name (for packet data only)âÂÂThe access point name is needed to es tablish a connection to the packet data and UMTS networks. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually prov ided by the service provider. The user name is often case-sensitive. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter a new password every time you log in to a serv er, or if you do not want to save your password in the phone, select Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually prov ided by the service provider. The password is often case-sensitive. Authentication âÂÂSelect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on what you are setting up, write the Web address or the ad dress of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect the Internet protocol type to use: IPv4 settings or IPv6 settings . The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4)âÂÂEnter the IP address of your phone. Name servers âÂÂIn Primary name server: , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Second. name server: , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your Internet servic e provider to obtain these addresses. Glossary: The domain name se rvice (DNS) is an Internet service that tran slates domain names such as www.nokia-asia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195. Proxy serv. address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affe ct all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data conn. âÂÂIf you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the phone registers to the packet data network. Also, starting an active packet data connection is quicker (for example, to send and receive e-mail). If you select When needed , the phone uses a packet data conn ection only if you start an application or action that need s it. If there is no packet data coverage and you select When available , the phone periodically tries to establis h a packet data connection.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 111 Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your phone as a packet data modem to your computer. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from your network operator or service provider in a configuration message, or the settings may be stored on your SIM or USIM card. You can save these settings to your phone, view or delete them in Configurations . Date and time See "Clock settings" , p. 15 . See also the language settings in "General" , p. 106 . Security Phone and SIM PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, the code is requested each time the phone is swit ched on. Deactivating the personal identification numbe r (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. See "Glossary of PIN and lock codes" , p. 112 . PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9. See "Glossary of PIN and lock codes" , p. 112 . Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Autolock period âÂÂYou can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the ph one automatically locks and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the autolock period. To unlock the phone, enter the lock code. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Tip! To lock the phone manually, press . A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . Lock if SIM changed âÂÂYou can set the phone to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your phone. The phone maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group ( )âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 112 When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM services ( )âÂÂYou can set the phone to display confirmation message s when you are using a SIM card service. Glossary of PIN and lock codes If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification number (PIN) codeâÂÂThis code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usua lly supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrec t PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked, and you need to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. See the information about the PUK code in this section. UPIN codeâÂÂThis code may be supplied with the USIM card. T h e U S I M c a r d i s a n e n h a n c e d v e r s i o n o f t h e S I M c a r d a n d is supported by UMTS mob ile phones. The UPIN code protects the USIM card against unauthorised use. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your phone. Lock code (also known as secu rity code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock th e phone to avoid unauthorised use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorised use of yo ur phone, change the lock code. Keep the new code se cret and in a safe place separate from your phone. Personal unblocking key (PUK ) code and PUK2 codeâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits ) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the co de is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operato r whose USIM card is in your phone. Certificate management Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Glossary: Digital certificates are used to verify the origin of the XHTML or WML pages and installed software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority cert ificates that are stor ed in your phone. Press to see a list of person al certificates, if available.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 113 Options in the certificate management main view are Certificate details , Delete , Trust settings, Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferri ng confidential information. The y sho uld a lso b e use d if y ou w ant t o red uce t he r isk o f viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet is shown even if the certific ate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the peri od of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified on the phone display if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your phone. To check certificate details, sc roll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: ⢠Certificate not trusted âÂÂYou have not set any application to use the certificate. See "Change the trust settings" , p. 113 . ⢠Expired certificate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before changing any certific ate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 114 Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the se lected certificate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to change the value. Call diverting Call divert allows you to divert your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. 1 Press , and select Tools > Settings > Call divert . 2 Select which calls you want to divert: Voice calls , Data and video calls , or Fax calls . 3 Select the desired divert op tion. To divert voice calls w h e n y o u r n u m b e r i s b u s y o r w h e n y o u r e j e c t i n c o m i n g calls, select If busy . 4 Set the divert option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several divert options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring Call barring allows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the phone. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls still may be possible to certain official emergency numbers.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 115 Network Your phone can automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Network mode (shown only if supported by the operator)âÂÂSelect which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the phone uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements between the network operators. Contact your network operator for more details. Operator selection âÂÂSelect Automatic to set the phone to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the phone soun ds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. Th e selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home network, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one se rvice provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info display âÂÂSelect On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: A headset is connected. A loopset is connected. The headset is unavailable, or a Bluetooth connection to a headset is lost. Select Headset , Loopset , or Bluetooth handsfree , and the following options are available: Default profile âÂÂTo set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a ce rtain enhancement to your phone. See "ProfilesâÂÂSet tones" , p. 22 . Automatic answer âÂÂTo set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the Ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disabled.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 116 Cover display settings Brightness âÂÂTo change the brightness of the cover display, close the fold, and adjust the brightness on the cover display with the joystick. Wallpaper âÂÂSelect the background image and how time is displayed on the cover display in the standby mode. Power saver âÂÂSelect the cover display power saver type, its time-out period, and if an im age or an animation screen saver is shown after the time -out period before the power saver is activated. Voice commands You can use voice commands to control your phone. For more information about the enhanced voice commands supported by your phone, see "Voice dialling" , p. 27 . To activate enhanced vo ice commands for starting applications or profil es, you must open the Voice com. application and its Profiles folder. Press , and select Tools > Voice com. > Profiles ; the phone creates voice tags for the applications an d profiles. You can now use enhanced voice commands by pressing and holding the capture key and saying a voice command. The voice command is the name of th e application or profile displayed in the list. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, scroll to it, select Options > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, abbreviations, and acronyms. To change voice command settings, select Options > Settings . To switch off the synthesiser that plays recognised voice tags and co mmands in the selected phone language, select Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learning, for exampl e, when the main user of the phone has changed, select Remove my adapts. . Application manager Press , and select Tools > Manager . You can install two types of applications and software to your phone: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ) . The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifically designed for your Nokia N90. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product: the Nokia N90-1.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 117 Installation files may be tran sferred to your phone from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using a Bluetooth connection. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your phone or a memory card. If you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, save the file to a memory card (local disk). Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the attachme nts view, scroll to the installation file, and pre ss to start installation. Install applications and software Tip! You can also use Nokia Application Installer available in Nokia PC Suit e to install applications. See the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. Application icons are as fo llows: .sis application; Java application; applicat ion is not fully installed; application is installed on the memory card. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . ⢠To display the security certificate details of the application, select Options > View certificate . See "Certificate management" , p. 112 . ⢠If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install th e application again from the original installation fi le or the back-up copy. ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the se rver. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 Open Manager , and scroll to an installation file. Alternatively, search the ph one memory or the memory card in File mgr. , or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installation file.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 118 Select the application, and press to start the installation. Tip! While browsing, you can download an installation file and inst all it without closing the connection. 2 Select Options > Install . During installation, the phone shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application wi thout a digital signature or certification, the phone disp lays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed application, locate it in the menu, and press . To start a network connec tion and to view extra information about the applicatio n, scroll to it, and select Options > Go to web address , if available. To see what software packag es have been installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . T o s e n d y o u r i n s t a l l a t i o n l o g t o a h e l p d e s k s o t h a t t h e y c a n see what has been installed or removed, select Options > Send log > Via text message or Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail se ttings are in place). Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software packag e or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. Note: If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Application settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Software installation âÂÂSelect if Symbian software can be installed: On , Signed only , or Off . Online certif. check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default address used when checking online certificates.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 119 Some Java applications may require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a netw ork connection to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the Manager main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Suite settings to change settings related to that specific application. Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Press , and select Tools > Activ. keys to view the digital rights activation keys stored in your phone: ⢠Valid keys ( ) are connected to one or more media files. ⢠With expired keys ( ), you have no time to use the media file, or the time pe riod for using the file is exceeded. To view the Expired activation keys, press . To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an activation key, and Options > Activate content . Activation keys ca nnot be updated if Web service message rece ption is disabled. See "Web service messages" , p. 78 . To view which keys are no t in use at the moment ( Not used ), press twice. Unused activation keys have no media files connected to them saved in the phone. To view detailed information su ch as the validity status and ability to send the file, se lect an activation key, and press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Troubleshooting 120 Troubleshooting Q&A Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices have activated Bluetooth connectivity. Check that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in hidden mode. Check that both devices are compatible. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connected to your phone, you can either end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connect ivity. Press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth > Off . Multimedia messaging Q: What should I do when the phone cannot receive a multimedia message beca use memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error message: Not enough memory to retrieve message. Delete some data first. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, press , and select Tools > File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The phone is trying to retr ieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging centre. Check that the settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Q: How can I end the data connection when the phone starts a data connection again and again? A: To stop the phone from making a data connection, select : Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval âÂÂTo control the retrieval of multimedia messages manually, select Manual . When you receive a multimedia message, the phone asks whether you w a n t t o r e t r i e v e i t o r n o t . To reject all incoming multimedia messages, select Off . Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail settings > Mailboxes > Automatic retrieval > Header retrieval > Off âÂÂTo disable automatic header retrieval. You can still retrieve headers to your phone manually.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Troubleshooting 121 Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: The contact card may not have a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in Contacts . Entries that are saved only on the SIM card are not shown in the contacts directory. To copy contacts from the SIM card to Contacts , see "Copy contacts" , p. 38 . Camera Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection window is clean. Q: Why is the camera applicat ion not in the main menu? A: In the standby mode, the camera application is started when you activate the Imagin g mode or the Camera mode. See "Modes" , p. 11 . Calendar Q: Why are the week numbers missing? A: If you have changed the calend ar settings so that the week starts on a day other than Monday, the week numbers are not shown. Browser services Q: What do I do if the followi ng message is displayed: No valid access point defined. Define one in Web settings. ? A: Insert the correct browser settings. Contact your service provider for instructions. Log Q: Why does the log appear empty? A: You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events, press , and select My own > Log . Scroll right, and select Options > Filter > All communication . Q: How do I delete my log information? A: To clear the log, press , and select My own > Log . Scroll right, and select Options > Clear log or go to Settings > Log duration > No log . These will erase the log contents, recent calls register, and message delivery reports permanently. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems in co nnecting the phone to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite on the CD-ROM. If Nokia PC Suite is installed and running, you can use Nokia Get connected wizard available in Nokia PC Suite to connect to your PC . For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia-asia.com. Access codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your phone dealer.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Troubleshooting 122 If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Application not responding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: Open the application switch ing window by pressing and holding . Then scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Display Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my phone? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Memory low Q: What can I do if my phone memory is low? A: You can delete the following items regularly to avoid memory getting low: ⢠Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the phone memory ⢠Saved browser pages ⢠Images and photos in Gallery To delete contact information, ca lendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and any of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item). Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: Save your data using one of the following methods: ⢠Use Nokia PC Suite to make a back up copy of all data to a compatible computer. ⢠Send images to your e-mail address, and then save the images to your computer. ⢠Send data using a Bluetooth connection to a compatible device. ⢠Store data on a compatible memory card.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information 123 Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal , replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and rech arge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging in dicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the batt ery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the packaging and inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information 124 Authenticate hologram 1 When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2 When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it . Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic original If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information 125 What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an au thentic Nokia battery, please do warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit not use the battery. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may al so invalidate any approval or www.nokia-asia.com/batterycheck.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements 126 Nokia original enhancements A new extensive range of enhancements is available for your phone. Select the enha ncements which accommodate your specific communication needs. List of compatible enhancements: Audio Headset HS-5 Boom Headset HDB-4 FM Radio Headset HS-2R Wireless Headset HDW-3 Wireless Clip-on Headset HS-21W Wireless Boom Headset HS-4W Wireless Headset HS-11W Wireless Image Headset HS-13W Inductive Loopset LPS-4 TTY Adapter HDA-10 Car Headrest Handsfree BHF-3 Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-3 Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W Wireless Car Kit CK-1W Advanced Car Kit CK-7W Mobile Charger (LCH-12 update) DC-4 Covers Non-changeable covers Data Wireless GPS Module LD-1W Connectivity Cable DKU-2 128 MB MultiMediaCard MU-2 256 MB MultiMediaCard MU-9 Imaging Nokia Remote Camera PT-6 Messaging Wireless Keyboard SU-8W Digital Pen SU-1B Power Compact Charger AC-3
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements 127 Some of the enhancements are described in detail below. For availability of the enhanc ements, please check with your local dealer. A few prac tical rules for enhancements operation: ⢠Keep the enhancements out of small children's reach. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that all mobile phone equipment in a vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Use only batteries, chargers and enhancements approved by the phone manufacturer. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous . Battery # Variation in operation ti mes may occur depending on SIM card, network and usage settings, usage style and environments. Nokia Wireless Boom Headset HS-4W Type Tech Talktime# Standby# BL-5B Li-Ion up to 4 hours 30 mins (GSM), up to 2 hours 20 mins (WCDMA) up to 10 days
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements 128 Gain more freedom with the Nokia Wireless Boom Headset. Whether rushing to a meeting or just out for a stroll, you don't have to go searching th rough your bag or your coat to take the call. Handsfree convenience make this light, comfortable headset a pleasure to use. It's elegant, comfortable tech nology finely honed to the needs and rhythms of your life, both business and pleasure. Don't miss a stride. ⢠Stylish, comfortable wireless headset ⢠Bluetooth wireless technology ⢠Convenient call handling from the headset ⢠Effortless handsfree functionality ⢠Switches easily from one ear to the other ⢠LED light for status indication Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W Get on the road with the Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree. This compact unit communicates with your compatible phone via Blue tooth wireless technology within a 10-meter range. "S peech tracking" uses four microphones selecting from 19 di rections to lock on to the direction from which speech is coming and filter out any unwanted background noise co ming from other areas. Plus it's easy to install - just plug it in to the vehicle's lighter socket.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements 129 Key Features: ⢠Wireless connection to comp atible phone via Bluetooth technology ⢠Speech tracking technology reduces background noise ⢠Answer and end calls an d adjust volume from integrated buttons ⢠One-step installation: plugs in to vehicle lighter socket ⢠Retractable cable to charge your compatible phone on the go Nokia Wireless Keyboard SU-8W Improve your productivity with the Nokia Wireless Keyboard. Write email, text messages, or meeting notes quickly and easily with a fu ll QWERTY keyboard. With a small, foldable, lightweight design, the Nokia Wireless Keyboard is comfortable to carry and use, which makes it a perfect tool for your mobile wireless office. Key Features: ⢠Foldable, lightweight QWERTY keyboard ⢠Power on/off key plus automatic power-off when folded ⢠Short-cut keys for messagi ng and main application menu of compatible phone ⢠Wireless connection to compatible phone (Bluetooth wireless technology) ⢠3 LED's representing: Power on/off, wireless connection status, battery status ⢠Powered by 2 x AAA batteries
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Care and maintenance 130 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of su perior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with ca re. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipit ation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temper ature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the devi ce other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes, before sending your device to a service facility. All of the above suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information 131 Additional safety information Your device and its enhancemen ts may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment Remember to follow any specia l regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines wh en used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm (5/8 inch) away from the body. Wh en a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn op eration, it should not contain metal and should position th e device the above-stated distance from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to th e network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are follo wed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnet ic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and pers ons with a hearing aid should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical de vices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from extern al RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in th ese areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care fa cilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the inde pendent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following: ⢠Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker; ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket; ⢠Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device and move the device away.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information 132 Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If in terference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injectio n systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic spee d control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your ve hicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate an y warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device , its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an ai r bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objec ts, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployme nt area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly instal led and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wi reless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage faciliti es, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information 133 Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, in cluding this device, operate using radio signal s, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guar anteed. You should never rely solely on any wire less device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the end key as many t imes as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call unt il given permission to do so. Warning: In the offline profile you cannot make (or receive) any calls, excep t make calls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require network coverage. Warning: You cannot make emergency calls in the Imaging mode, because the keypad is not active. To make an emergency call, ac tivate the Fold open mode.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information 134 Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and esta blish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scien tific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluati on of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all person s, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specifi c Absorption Ra te, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg)*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the de vice while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple pow er levels so as to use only the power required to reach the ne twork. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.29 W/kg. SAR values may vary dependin g on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. * The SAR limit for mobile device s used by the public is 2.0 W/ kg averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 135 Index A access points 108 settings 109 activation keys 119 alarms alarm clock 15 calendar 80 applications installing 117 Java 116 B backing up 18 Bluetooth 98 connecting two devices, pairing 100 device address 100 factory set passcode 100 headset 115 pairing 100 passcode, glossary explanation 100 security 99 switching off 101 bookmarks 83 brightness display 107 , 116 setting in camera 49 C cache, clearing 86 calendar alarm 79 creating entries 79 synchronising PC Suite 80 call register See log calls dialled numbers 35 duration 35 international 26 received 35 settings 107 settings for call divert 114 transferring 34 camera adjusting brightness 49 adjusting colour and lighting 44 adjusting lighting and colour 41 , 43 adjusting video recorder settings 50 camera mode 13 edit videos 51 flash 44 image setup settings 44 imaging mode 12 saving video clips 50 scenes 44 self-timer 43 sending images 43 sequence mode 43 still image camera settings 45 video shortcuts 50 camera mode 46 adjusting image settings 47 CD-ROM 102 certificates 112 chat See instant messaging clear screen See standby mode clearing memory log information 121
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 136 clock 15 alarm 15 settings 15 codes 111 lock code PIN code 112 PIN2 code 112 security code 112 computer connections 101 conference call 27 connection settings 108 contact cards 37 inserting pictures 37 sending 38 storing DTMF tones 34 copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 38 text 66 copyright protection see activation keys cutting text 66 D data connections details 102 ending 102 indicators 13 date 15 digital rights management, DRM see activation keys DNS, domain name service, glossary explanation 110 E editing videos adding effects 51 adding sound clips 51 adding transitions 51 custom video clips 51 e-mail 67 automatic retrieving 72 offline 73 opening 72 remote mailbox 71 retrieving from mailbox 71 settings 76 viewing attachments 72 F file formats .jad 116 .jar 116 , 117 .sis 116 RealOne Player 58 file manager 17 fixed dialling 39 fold 11 , 12 G gallery ordering files in albums 56 H handsfree see loudspeaker headset settings 115 help application 15 I indicators 13 instant messaging 91 blocking 93 connecting to a server 92 groups 95 recording messages 94 sending instant messages 93 user ID, glossary explanation 94 Internet See Web Internet access points (IAP) See access points IP address, glossary explanation 110
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 137 J Java See applications L lock code 112 log erasing contents 36 filtering 36 log duration 36 loopset settings 115 loudspeaker 16 M mailbox 71 automatic retrieving 72 media files fast forward 59 file formats 58 mute sound 59 rewind 59 memory clearing memory 35 viewing memory consumption 17 memory card 18 memory card adapter see the Quick Start Guide, reduced- size MultiMediaCard adapter menu, rearranging 22 messaging e-mail 67 multimedia messages 67 text messages 67 modes camera 13 fold closed 12 fold open 11 imaging 12 movies, muvees custom muvees 60 quick muvees 60 multimedia messages 67 mute sound 59 N Nokia original enhancements 126 P packet data connections 102 GPRS, glossary explanation 108 settings 110 pasting text 66 PC connections via Bluetooth or USB cable 101 PC Suite calendar data 80 synchronisation 101 transferring images to a PC 54 transferring media files 18 transferring music files to your memory card 58 viewing phone memory data 17 personalisation 24 phonebook See contact cards PIN code 112 profiles 22 R reminder See calendar, alarm remote mailbox 71 ringing tones personal ringing tone 39 receiving in a text message 70 RSMMC, reduced-size MMC see the Quick Start Guide S scenes image scenes 45 video scenes 45
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 138 security code See lock code sending contact cards, business cards 38 images 43 video clips 54 service commands 63 settings access codes 111 access points 109 Bluetooth connection 99 calendar 80 call barring 114 call diverting 114 certificates 112 configuring 14 cover display 116 data connections 108 date and time 111 display 107 headset 115 IM 92 , 96 language 106 lock code 112 loopset 115 original settings 106 personalising the device 21 PIN code 112 screen saver 107 UPIN code 112 UPUK code 112 shortcuts imaging mode 42 Web connection 82 SIM card copying names and numbers to phone 38 messages 74 names and numbers 39 sis file 116 SMS centre, short message service centre 75 snooze 15 software transferring a file to your device 117 sound clips 54 sounds muting a ringing tone 32 recording sounds 90 speed dialling 27 standby mode 21 synchronisation 103 T text message service centre adding new 75 text messages 67 themes 24 time 15 transferring content from another device 23 U UPIN code 112 UPUK code 112 USB cable 101 USIM card see glossary explanation in the Quick Start Guide USSD commands 63 V video call 28 answering 33 rejecting 33 video clips 54 video player See RealOne Player voice commands 116 voice dialling 27
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 139 voice mailbox 26 changing the phone number 26 diverting calls to voice mailbox 114 voice messages 26 voice tags 116 making calls 28 volume control 16 during a call 26 , 29 loudspeaker 16 W Web access points, see access points browser 82 browser 74
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY We, NOKIA CORPORATION de clare under our sole responsibility that the produ ct RM-42 is in conformity with the provisions of the following Council Directive: 1999/5/EC. A copy of the Declar ation of Conformity can be found at http://www.nokia.com/phones/ declaration_of_conformity/ Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Reproduction, transfer, distribution or storage of part or all of the contents in this document in any form without the prior writt en permission of No kia is prohibited. Nokia, Nokia Connecting People, and Pop- Port are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nokia Corporation. Other product and company names mentioned herein may be trademarks or tradenames of their respective owners. Nokia tune is a sound ma rk of Nokia Corporation. This product includes software licensed from Symbia n Software Ltd é 1998-200(5). Symbian and Symbian OS are trademarks of Symbian Ltd. Java⢠and all Java-based marks are tradem arks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. Stac î, LZS î, é 1996, Stac , Inc., é 1994-1996 Microsoft Co rporation. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Hi/fn î, LZS î, é 1988-98, Hi/fn. Includes one or more U.S. Patents: No. 4701745, 5016009, 5126739, 5146221, and 5414425. Other patents pending. Part of the software in this product is é Copyright ANT Ltd. 1998. All rights reserved. US Patent No 5818437 and other pending pate nts. T9 text input software Copyright é 1997-2005. Tegic Communications, Inc. All rights reserved. MPEG-4 This product is licensed under the MPEG-4 Visual Patent Portfolio License (i) for personal and noncommercial use in connect ion with information which has been encoded in compliance with the MPEG-4 Visual Standard by a consumer engaged in a personal and noncomme rcial activity and (ii) for use in connection with MPEG-4 video provided by a licensed video provider. No license is granted or shall be implied for any other use. Additional i nformation including that relating to promotional, internal and commercial use s may be obtained from MPEG LA, LLC. See <http://www.mpegla.com>. Nokia operates a policy of continuous deve lopment. Nokia reserves the right to make changes and improvements to any of th e products described in this document without prior notice. Under no circumstances shall Nokia be res ponsible for any loss of data or income or any special, incidental, consequential or indirect damages howsoever caused. The contents of this document are provided âÂÂas isâÂÂ. Except as required by applicable law, no warranties of any kind, either exp ress or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose, are made in relation to the accuracy, reliability or conten ts of this document. Nokia reserves the right to revise this document or withdraw it at any time without prior notice The availability of particul ar products may vary by re gion. Please check with the Nokia dealer nearest to you. Export Controls This device may contain commodities, technology or software subject to export laws and regulations from the US and other countries. Diversion contrary to law is prohibited. FCC / INDUSTRY CANADA NOTICE Your device may cause TV or radio inte rference (for example, when using a telephone in close proximity to receiving equipment). The FCC or Industry Canada can require you to stop using your tele phone if such interference cannot be eliminated. If you require assistance, contac t your local service fa cility. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subje ct to the condition that this device does not ca use harmful interference.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contents For your safety .......... ................................. 8 Your Nokia N90 ...................................... 11 Modes ................................... .................................................. 11 Fold open mode .......... .................................................. 11 Fold closed mode ....... .................................................. 12 Imaging mode ............. .................................................. 12 Camera mode .............. .................................................. 13 Essential indicators ............................................................. 13 Attach the wrist st rap ........................................................ 14 Configure settings ............................................................... 14 Nokia support on th e Web ................................................ 14 Help ......................................................................................... 15 Clock ........................................................................................ 15 Clock settings..... ........................................................... 15 World clock. ................. .................................................. 16 Volume and loudspeaker control .................................... 16 File manager .............. ........................................................... 17 View memory consumption ...................................... 17 Memory lowâÂÂfree memory ....................................... 17 Memory card tool..... ........................................................... 18 Format a memory card ............................................... 19 Useful shortcuts ................................................................... 19 Personalise your device ...........................21 ProfilesâÂÂSet tones .............................................................. 22 Offline profile .... ........................................................... 22 Transfer content from another device .......................... 23 Change the look of yo ur device ...................................... 24 Active standby mode .......................................................... 24 Make calls ................. ...............................26 Voice calls .................. ........................................................... 26 Make a conference call.............................................. 27 Speed dial a phone number ...................................... 27 Voice dialling .............. .................................................. 27 Video calls .................. ........................................................... 28 Video sharing ........... ........................................................... 30 Video sharing requirements...................................... 30 Settings ........................ .................................................. 30 Share video .................. .................................................. 31 Accept an invitat ion ................................................... 32
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Answer or reject a call ........................... ............................ 32 Answer or reject a video call .................................... 33 Call waiting ............. ..................................................... 34 Options during a voic e call ....................................... 34 Options during a vide o call ....................................... 34 Log ........................................................................................... 35 Recent calls ............. ..................................................... 35 Call duration ............ ..................................................... 35 Packet data ............... ..................................................... 35 Monitor all communication events ........................ 35 Contacts (Phonebook) .............................37 Save names and numb ers ................................................. 37 Default numbers and addresses .............................. 38 Copy contacts ......... ........................................... ................... 38 SIM directory and other SIM services .................... 39 Add ringing tones for contacts ........................................ 39 Create contact grou ps ....................................................... 39 Remove members from a group .............................. 40 Camera and Gallery ................................. 41 Camera ................................................................................... 41 Take pictures in the Imaging mode ........................ 41 Take pictures in the Camera mode ......................... 46 Edit images ............... ..................................................... 47 Tips on taking good photographs............................ 48 Record videos .......... ..................................................... 49 Edit video clips ............................................................. 51 Gallery .................................................................................... 54 View images and vide o clips .................................... 55 Albums ............................... ............................................. 56 Imaging ........................ ............................. 57 Image print ...................... ..................................................... 57 Printer selection ........................................ ................... 57 Print preview ........... ..................................................... 57 Print settings ........... ..................................................... 58 RealPlayer⢠...................... ..................................................... 58 Play video or sound clips ........................................... 58 Create a track list ........................................................ 59 Stream content over the air ..................................... 59 Receive RealPlayer se ttings ...................................... 59 Movie Director ................ ..................................................... 60 Create a quick muve e................................................. 61 Create a custom mu vee ............................................. 61 Messaging.................... ............................. 63 Write text ......................... ..................................................... 64 Traditional text in put ................................................. 64 Predictive text inputâÂÂDictionary ............................ 65 Copy text to clip board ............................................... 66
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 5 Write and send mess ages.................................................. 67 Receive MMS and e-mail settings .......................... 68 InboxâÂÂreceive messages ................................................... 69 Multimedia messages ................................................. 69 Data and settings......................................................... 70 Web service messages ................................................ 70 My folders ................... ........................................................... 70 Mailbox......................................... .......................................... 71 Open the mailbox ........................................................ 71 Retrieve e-mail messages.......................................... 71 Retrieve e-mail messages automatically .............. 72 Delete e-mail messages ............................................. 72 Disconnect from the mailbox ................................... 73 OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent........................... 73 View messages on a SIM card ......................................... 74 Messaging settings .. ........................................................... 74 Text messages .... ........................................................... 74 Multimedia messages ................................................. 75 E-mail .............................................................................. 76 Web service messages ................................................ 78 Cell broadcast .... ........................................................... 78 Other settings .... ........................................................... 78 Calendar ..................... .............................. 79 Create calendar entr ies ...................................................... 79 Set a calendar alarm ................................................... 80 Calendar views .. ........................................... ........................ 80 Remove calendar entries ................................................... 80 Calendar settings ................................................................ 81 Web ............................ ............................... 82 Access the Web......... ........................................................... 82 Receive browser settings ........................................... 82 Enter the settings manually ..................................... 82 Bookmarks view ........ ........................................................... 83 Add bookmarks manually .......................................... 83 Send bookmarks ......... .................................................. 83 Make a connection ............................................................. 83 Connection securi ty .................................................... 84 Browse .................................. .................................................. 84 View saved pages ........................................................ 85 Download and purchase items ........................................ 85 End a connection...... ........................................................... 86 Empty the cache .......................................................... 86 Web settings .............. ........................................................... 86 Office ......................... ...............................88 Calculator .............................................................................. 88 Calculate percentages ................................................ 88 Converter ............................................................................... 88 Set base currency and exchange rates .................. 89
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 6 To-do ....................................................................................... 89 Create a task list .......................................................... 89 Notes ....................................................................................... 90 Recorder ............................ ..................................................... 90 My own ........................ ............................. 91 Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts .......................................................... 91 Delete a shortcut .... ..................................................... 91 IMâÂÂInstant messaging (c hat) ......................................... 91 Receive IM settings ..................................................... 92 Connect to an IM server ............................................ 92 Modify your IM settings ............................................ 92 Search for IM groups and users............................... 93 Join and leave an IM group ...................................... 93 Chat ................................................................................. 93 View and start conversations ................................... 94 IM contacts .............. ..................................................... 95 Manage IM groups ...................................................... 95 Administrate an IM group ......................................... 96 Chat server settin gs .................................................... 96 Connectivity ............ ................................. 98 Bluetooth connection ........................................................ 98 Bluetooth connection settings ................................ 99 Send data using a Bluetooth connection ............. 99 Pair devices...... ........................................................... 100 Receive data using a Bluetooth connection ...... 101 Switch off Bluetooth connectivity ....................... 101 PC connections ............... ................................................... 101 CD-ROM ....................................................................... 102 Your device as a modem ......................................... 102 Connection manager ........................................................ 102 View data connection details ................................ 102 Remote synchronisat ion.................................................. 103 Create a new synchronisation profile.................. 103 Synchronise data .... ................................................... 104 Device manager .............. ................................................... 105 Server profile settings .............................................. 105 Tools ......................... .............................. 106 Settings ................................................................................ 106 Phone settings ............................................................ 106 Call settings ............. ................................................... 107 Connection settings .................................................. 108 Date and time .......... ................................................... 111 Security ............................. ........................................... 111 Call diverting ........... ................................................... 114 Call barring ............. ................................................... 114 Network........................................................................ 115 Enhancement settings ............................................. 115 Cover display settings ...................................................... 116 Voice commands ............ ................................................... 116
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 7 Application manage r ....................................................... 116 Install applications and software ......................... 117 Remove applications and software ..................... 118 Application settings ................................................. 118 Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files . 119 Troubleshooting ........ ............................ 120 Q&A ...................................................................................... 120 Battery information.............................. 123 Charging and discharging .............................................. 123 Nokia battery authentication guidelines ................... 123 Nokia original enhancements .............. 126 Battery .................................. ............................................... 127 Nokia Wireless Boom Headset HS-4W ....................... 127 Nokia Wireless Plug-in Ca r Handsfree HF-6W ........ 128 Nokia Wireless Keyboard SU-8W ................................. 129 Care and maintenance ......................... 130 Additional safety information ............. 131 Index .......................... ............................ 135
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 8 For your safety Read these simple guidelines . Not following them may be dangerous or illegal. Read the complete user guide for further information. SWITCH ON SAFELY Do not switch the phone on when wireless phone use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. ROAD SAFETY COMES FIRST Obey all local laws. Always keep your hands free to operate the vehicle while driving. Your first consideration while driving should be road safety. INTERFERENCE All wireless phones may be susceptible to interferen ce, which could affect performance. SWITCH OFF IN HOSPITALS Follow any restrictions. Switch the phone off near medical equipment. SWITCH OFF IN AIRCRAFT Follow any restrictions. Wireless devices can cause interference in aircraft. SWITCH OFF WHEN REFUELING Do not use the phone at a refuelling point. Do not use near fuel or chemicals. SWITCH OFF NEAR BLASTING Follow any restrictions. Do not use the phone where blasting is in progress. USE SENSIBLY Use only in the normal position as explained in the product documentation. Do not touch the antenna unnecessarily. QUALIFIED SERVICE Only qualified personnel may install or repair this product. ENHANCEMENTS AND BATTERIES Use only approved enhancements and batteries. Do not connect incompatible products. WATER-RESISTANCE Your phone is not water-resistant. Keep it dry. BACK-UP COPIES Remember to make back-up copies or keep a written record of all important information stored in your phone.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 9 CONNECTING TO OTHER DEVICES When connecting to any other device, read its user guide for detailed safety instructions. Do not connect incompatible products. EMERGENCY CALLS Ensure the phone is switched on and in service. The keypad is active only in the Fold open mode. Press the end key as many times as need ed to clear the display and return to the start screen. Enter the emergency number, then press the call key. Give your location. Do not end the call until given permission to do so. About your device The wireless device described in this guide is approved for use on the EGSM 900/ 1800/1900 and UMTS 2100 networks. Contact your se rvice provider for more information about networks. When using the features in th is device, obey all laws and respect privacy and legiti mate rights of others. When taking and using images or video clips, obey all laws and respect local customs as we ll as privacy and legitimate rights of others. Warning: To use any features in this device, other than the alarm clock, the device must be switched on. Do not switch the de vice on when wireless device use may cause interference or danger. Network Services To use the phone you must ha ve service from a wireless service provider. Many of th e features in this device depend on features in the wireless network to function. These network services may not be available on all networks or you may have to make specific arrangements with your service provider be fore you can utilize network services. Your service provid er may need to give you additional instructions for their use and explain what charges will apply. Some networks may have limitations that affect how you can use ne twork services. For instance, some networks may not suppo rt all language-dependent characters and services. Netw ork features are designated in this guide by . Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially co nfigured. This configuration may include changes in menu names, menu order and icons. Contact your service provider for more information.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 10 This device supports WAP 2.0 protocols (HTTP and SSL) that run on TCP/IP protocols. Some features of this device, such as MMS, browsing, e-mail and content downloading via browser or over MMS, requir e network support for these technologies. For availability and information on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor . This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Enhancements, batteries, and chargers Always switch the device of f and disconnect the charger before removing the battery. Check the model number of an y charger before use with this device. This device is intended for use when supplied with power from the DC-4, AC -3 and AC-4 charger, and from the AC-1, ACP-7, ACP-8, ACP-9, ACP-12, LCH-8, LCH-9, or LCH-12 charger wh en used with the charger adapter CA-44 delivered with your phone. The battery intended for use with this device is BL-5B. Warning: Use only batteries, chargers, and enhancements approved by Nokia for use with this particular model. The us e of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty, and may be dangerous. For availability of approved enhancements, please check with your dealer. When you di sconnect the power cord of any enhancement, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 11 Your Nokia N90 Model number: Nokia N90-1 Hereinafter referred to as Nokia N90. Modes Your device has four mech anical modes that support different use situations: Fold closed , Fold open for using the device, Imaging for recording video and taking pictures, and Camera for taking pictures. To switch between the modes, turn th e fold and the swing axis camera. There is a short ti me-out before a mode is activated. Fold open mode When you open the fold, the Fold open mode is activated automatically: the main display lights up, the keypad is available, and you can access the menu. You can scroll in the menu with the scroll key or the joystick. The Fold open mode is activated even if the fold is not fully opened. The fold opens close to 150 degrees, as shown in the picture. Do not force the fold to open more.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 12 Fold closed mode When the fold is closed, the main display is deactivated and the cover display lights up. Ongoing calls are ended, unless the loudspeaker is in use or a headset is connected. If you are using the player to listen to a sound clip, it continues to play. In the Fold closed mode, the cover display provides limited functions. On the standby mode display, the signal strength and battery indicators, operator logo, time information, status indicators, and the name of the currently ac tive profile (if other than General ) may be shown. If you are listening to a sound clip, volume bars and track in formation are displayed. If the keypad is not locked, you can use the power key, the joystick, and the capture key (for enhanced voice commands). To select commands on the display, such as Show and Back , move the joystick to highlight the desired text, and press the joystick. Calendar and clock alarms an d notes for missed calls and new received messages are also displayed. You can view received text messages and th e text and imag e objects of received multimedia messages on the cover display. To view other types of messages, open the fold, and view the message on the main display. Incoming calls are indicated by their normal tone and a note. To answer a call and us e the handset, open the fold. To answer a call and use th e loudspeaker, select Answer . If a headset is connected to the device, press the answer key on the headset. To make calls or use the menu, open the fold. Imaging mode In the Imaging mode, you can re cord videos, take pictures, edit video clips and images, and send live video during a video call . See "Camera and Gallery" , p. 41 and "Video calls" , p. 28 . To activate the Imaging mode, open the fold up to 90 degrees, hold the device sideways, and turn the fold up so that the main display faces you. The camera starts, and you can see the view to be captured. You can also turn the swing axis camera. In the Imaging mode, the camera unit turns 180 degrees counterclo ckwise and close to 135 degrees clockwise. Do not fo rce the camera unit to turn more.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 13 In the Imaging mode, the keypad is not active. You can use the capture key, joystick, po wer key, the upper and lower selection keys next to the ma in display, and to end an active call. Warning: You cannot make emergency calls in the Imaging mode, because the keypad is not active. To make an emergency call, activate the Fold open mode. Camera mode In the Camera mode, you can take pictures quickly. You can use the camera during an active call. See "Camera and Gallery" , p. 41 . To activate the Camera mode, turn the swing axis camera when the fold is closed. The viewfinder appear s on the cover display. The camera unit turns 180 degrees counterclockwise and close to 135 degrees clockwise. Do not force the camera unit to turn more. You can use the capture key, joystick, and power key in the Camera mode. Essential indicators âÂÂThe phone is being used in a GSM network. (network service)âÂÂThe phon e is being used in a UMTS network. See "Network" , p. 115 . âÂÂYou have received one or several messages to the Inbox folder in Messaging . âÂÂThere are messages waiting to be sent in the Outbox folder. See "OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent" , p. 73 . âÂÂYou have missed calls. See "Recent calls" , p. 35 . âÂÂShown if Ringing type is set to Silent and Message alert tone , IM alert tone , and E-mail alert tone are set to Off . See "ProfilesâÂÂSet tones" , p. 22 . âÂÂThe phone keypad is locked. See âÂÂKeypad lock (Keyguard)â in the Quick start guide. âÂÂYou have an active clock alarm. See "Clock" , p. 15 . âÂÂThe second phone line is being used. See "Call settings" , p. 107 . âÂÂAll calls to the phone are diverted to another number. If you have two phone lines, the divert indicator for the first line is and for the second . âÂÂA headset is connected to the phone. âÂÂA loopset is connected to the phone.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 14 âÂÂThe connection to a headse t with Bluetooth has been lost. âÂÂA data call is active. âÂÂA GPRS or EDGE packet da ta connection is available. âÂÂA GPRS or EDGE packet da ta connection is active. âÂÂA GPRS or EDGE packet da ta connection is on hold. These icons are shown instead of the signal strength indicator (shown in the top left corner in the standby mode). See "Packet data connections in GSM and UMTS networks" , p. 109 . âÂÂA UMTS packet data connection is available. âÂÂA UMTS packet data connection is active. âÂÂA UMTS packet data connection is on hold. âÂÂBluetooth connectivity is On . âÂÂData is being transmitted using a Bluetooth connection. See "Bluetooth connection" , p. 98 . âÂÂA USB connection is active. âÂÂYou have an e-mail that has been read, waiting for you to retrieve to your phone. âÂÂYou have an e-mail that has not been read, waiting for you to retrieve to your phone. Attach the wrist strap Thread the strap as shown in the picture, and tighten it. Configure settings To use multimedia messaging, GPRS, Internet, and other wireless services, you must have the proper configuration sett ings on your phone. You may have settings from your service providers already installed in your phone, or you may receive the settings from the service providers as a special text message. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . For more information on the availability of the settings, contact your network operator, service provider, nearest author ised Nokia dealer, or visit the support area on the Nokia website, www.nokia-asia.com/support. Nokia support on the Web Check www.nokia-asia.com/support or your local Nokia Web site for the latest versio n of this guide, additional information, downloads, and se rvices related to your Nokia product.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 15 Help Your device has context-sensi tive help. You can access the help from an application or from the main menu. When an application is open, to access help for the current view, select Options > Help . Example: To view instructions on how to create a contact card, start to cr eate a contact card, and select Options > Help . When you are reading the instructions, to switch between help and the application that is open in the background, press and hold . To open help from the main menu, select Tools > Help . Select the desired application to view a list of help topics. To search for help topics using keywords, select Options > Search by keyword . When you are reading a help to pic, to view other related topics, press or . Clock Press , and select Clock . To set a new alarm, select Options > Set alarm . Enter the alarm time, and select OK. When the alarm is active, the indicator is shown. To turn off the alarm, select Stop . When the alarm tone sounds, press any key, or select Snooze to stop the alarm for five minutes, after which it resumes. You can do this a maximum of five times. If the alarm time is reached while the device is switched off, the device switches itself on and starts sounding the alarm tone. If you select Stop , the device asks whether you want to activate the device for calls. Select No to switch off the device or Ye s to make and receive calls. Do not select Yes when wireless phone use may cause interference or danger. To cancel an alarm, select Clock > Options > Remove alarm . Clock settings To change the clock settings, select Options > Settings in the clock. To change the time or date, select Time or Date . To change the clock shown in the standby mode, scroll down, and select Clock type > Analogue or Digital .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 16 To allow the mobile phone ne twork to update the time, date, and time zone information to your phone , scroll down, and select Auto time update . For the Auto time update setting to take effe ct, the phone restarts. To change the alarm tone, scroll down, and select Clock alarm tone . To change the daylight-savin g time status, scroll down, and select Daylight-saving . Select On to add one hour to the My current city time. See "World clock" , p. 16 . When the daylight-saving is active, the indicator is shown in the clock main view. This setting is not shown if Auto time update is on. World clock Open Clock , and press to open the world clock view. In the world clock view, you can view the time in different cities. To add cities to the list, select Options > Add city . Enter the first letters of the city name. The search field appears automatically, and the matching cities are displayed. Select a city. You can add a maximum of 15 cities to the list. To set your current city, sc roll to a city, and select Options > My current city . The city is displayed in the clock main view, and the time in your phone is changed according to the city select ed. Check that the time is correct and matches your time zone. Volume and loudspeaker control To increase or decrease the volume level, when you have an active call or are listening to a sound, press or , respectively, or move the joystick right or left. The built-in loudspeaker allows you to speak and listen to the phone from a short distance without having to hold the phone to your ear, for example, having it on a table nearby. Sound applications use the loudspeaker by default. Warning: Do not hold the device near your ear when the loudspeaker is in use, because the volume may be extremely loud. To locate the loudspeaker, see âÂÂKeys and partsâ in the Quick start guide. To use the loudspeaker during a call, start a call, and select Options > Activate loudsp. . To turn off the loudspeaker wh en you have an active call or are listening to a sound, select Options > Activate handset .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 17 File manager Many features of the phone use memory to store data. These features include contac ts, messages, images, ringing tones, calendar and to- do notes, documents, and downloaded applications. The free memory available depends on how much data is already saved in the phone memory. You can use a memory card as extra storage space. Memory cards are rewrit able, so you can delete and save data on a memory card. To browse files and folders in the phone memory or on a memory card (if inserted), press , and select Tools > File mgr. . The phone memory view ( ) opens. Press to open the memory card view ( ). To move or copy files to a folder, press and at the same time to mark a file, and select Options > Move to folder or Copy to folder . Icons in File mgr. : Folder Folder that has a subfolder To find a file, select Options > Find and the memory from which to search, and enter a search text that matches the file name. Tip! You can use Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite to view th e different memories in your phone. See the CD-R OM supplied in the sales package. View memory consumption To view what types of data you have in the phone and how much memory the different da ta types consume, select Options > Memory details . Scroll down to Free memory to view the amount of free memory in the phone. To view the amount of free memory on the memory card, i f yo u h a v e a c a r d i n s e r t e d in t h e p h o n e , p r e s s to o p e n the memory card view, and select Options > Memory details . Memory lowâÂÂfree memory The phone notifies you if th e phone memory or memory card memory is getting low. If the phone memory starts to get low when your browser is open, then the browser is closed automatically to free some memory space. To free phone memory, transfer data to a memory card in the file manager. Mark files to be moved, select Move to folder > Memory card , and a folder.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 18 Tip! To free memory from th e phone or from the memory card, use Image Stor e available in Nokia PC Suite to transfer images and video clips to a compatible PC. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. T o r e m o v e d a t a t o f r e e m e m o r y , u s e File mgr. , or go to the respective application. For example, you can remove the following: ⢠Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the phone memory ⢠Saved Web pages ⢠Saved images, videos, or sound files ⢠Contact information â¢C a l e n d a r n o t e s ⢠Downloaded applications. See also "Application manager" , p. 116 . ⢠Any other data that you no longer need Memory card tool Note: This device uses a Reduced Size Dual Voltage (1.8/3V) MultiMediaCard (RS-MMC). To ensure interoperability, use only dual voltage RS-MMCs. Check the compatibility of an RS-MMC with its manufacturer or provider. Use only compatible Reduced- Size Multimedia cards (RS- MMC) with this device. Othe r memory cards, such as Secure Digital (SD) cards, do no t fit in the memory card slot and are not compatible with this device. Using an incompatible memory card ma y damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the incompatible card may be corrupted. Keep all memory cards out of the reach of small children. Press , and select Tools > Memory . You can use a memory card as extra storage space. It is also good to regularly back up the information in the phone memory to the memory card. The information can be restored to the phone later. See âÂÂInserting the memory cardâ in the Quick start guide.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 19 You cannot use the memory card if the door of the memory card slot is open. Important: Do not remove the memory card in the middle of an operation when the card is being accessed. Removing the card in the middle of an operation may damage the memory card as well as the device, and data stored on the card may be corrupted. To back up information from phone memory to a memory card, select Options > Backup phone mem. To restore information from th e memory card to the phone memory, select Options > Restore from card . Tip! To rename a memory card, select Options > Memory card name . Format a memory card When a memory card is reform atted, all data on the card is permanently lost. Some memory cards are supplied preformatted and others require formatting. Consult your retailer to find out if you must format the memory ca rd before you can use it. To format a memory card, select Options > Format mem. card . Select Yes to confirm. When fo rmatting is complete, enter a name for the me mory card, and select OK . Useful shortcuts Use shortcuts to quickly get the most from your device. Refer to the relevant sections in this user guide for further details of the functions. Shortcuts when taking pictures ⢠To zoom in and out, press the joystick up and down. ⢠To enter the Image setup settings, press the joystick. ⢠To change the flash mode, pr ess the joystick left or right. ⢠After you have taken a pictur e, to take a new picture, press the capture key halfway down. ⢠If you have activated an application in the Imaging mode, press the capture key to return to the camera. Shortcuts when recording videos ⢠To zoom in or zoom out, pr ess the joystick up or down. ⢠To enter the Video setup settings, press the joystick. ⢠If you have activated an application in the Imaging mode, press the capture key to return to the camera. Edit text and lists ⢠To mark an item in a list, scroll to it, and press and at the same time. ⢠To mark multiple items in a list, press and hold , while you press or . To end the selection, release , then release .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Your Nokia N90 20 ⢠To copy and paste text: Pres s and hold . At the same time, press or to select letter s and words, or or to select rows of te xt. As the selection moves, text is highlighted. To copy the text to clipboard, while still holding , press Copy . To insert the text into a document, press and hold and press Paste . Standby mode ⢠To switch between applications that are open, press and hold . If memory is low, the phone may close some applications. The phon e saves any unsaved data before closing an application. ⢠To change the profile, press , and select a profile. ⢠Press and hold to switch between General and Silent profiles. If you have two phone lines then this action will switch between the two lines. ⢠To open the last dialled numbers list, press . ⢠To use voice commands, press and hold the capture key. See "Voice commands" , p. 116 . ⢠To start a connection to Web , press and hold . See "Web" , p. 82 . For further shortcuts availabl e in the standby mode, see "Active standby mode" , p. 24 . Keypad lock (keyguard) ⢠To lock: In the standby mode, press , then . ⢠To unlock: Press , then . ⢠To lock the keypad in the Fold closed mode, press and select Lock keypad . ⢠To turn on the display light when the keypad lock is on, press . When the keypad lock is on, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Enter the emergency number, and press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 21 Personalise your device Your service provider may ha ve requested that certain features be disabled or not ac tivated in your device. If so, they will not appear on your device menu. Your device may also have been specially configured for your network provider. This configuration may include changes in menu names, menu order and icon s. Contact your service provider for more information. ⢠To use the standby main disp lay for fast access to your most frequently used applications, see "Active standby mode" , p. 24 . ⢠To change the standby mode background image or what is shown in the screen saver, see "Change the look of your device" , p. 24 , and "Cover display settings" , p. 116 . ⢠To customise the ringing tones, see "ProfilesâÂÂSet tones" , p. 22 . ⢠To change the shortcuts assigned for the different pr esses of the scroll key and left and right selection keys in the standby mode, see "Standby mode" , p. 106 . The scroll key shortcuts are not available if the active standby is on. ⢠To change the clock shown in the standby mode, press , and select Clock > Options > Settings > Clock type > Analogue or Digital . ⢠To change the clock alarm tone, press , and select Clock > Options > Settings > Clock Alarm tone and a tone. ⢠To change the calendar alarm tone, press , and select Calendar > Options > Settings > Calendar alarm tone and a tone. ⢠To change the welcome note to a text or an image, press , and select Tools > Settings > Phone > General > Welcome note or logo . ⢠To assign an individual ring ing tone to a contact, press , and select Contacts . See "Add ringing tones for contacts" , p. 39 . ⢠To assign a speed dial to a contact, press a numbered key in the standby mode ( is reserved for the voice mailbox), and press . Select Yes , then select a contact.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 22 ⢠To rearrange the main menu, in the main menu, select Options > Move , Move to folder , or New folder . You can move less used applicatio ns into folders, and place applications that you use more often into the main menu. ProfilesâÂÂSet tones To set and customise the ri nging tones, message alert tones, and other tones for di fferent events, environments, or caller groups, press , and select Tools > Profiles . If the currently selected profile is other than General , the profile name is shown at the top of the display in the standby mode. To change the profile, press in the standby mode. Scroll to the profile you wa nt to activate, and select OK . To modify a profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles . Scroll to the profile, and select Options > Personalise . Scroll to the setting you want to change, and press to open the choices. Tones stored on the memory card are indicated with . You can scroll through the tone list and listen to each one before you make your selection. Press any key to stop the sound. Tip! When you choose a tone, Tone downloads opens a list of bookmarks. You can select a bookmark and start connection to a Web page to download tones. Tip! For information on how to change the alert tone for the calendar or clock, see "Personalise your device" , p. 21 . To create a new profile, select Options > Create new . Offline profile The Offline profile lets you use the phone without connecting to the wireless ne twork. When you activate the Offline profile, the connection to the wireless network is turned off, as indicated by in the signal strength indicator. All wireless phone signals to and from the device are prevented. If you try to se nd messages, they are placed in the outbox to be sent later. Warning: In the offline profile you cannot make or receive any calls, except make calls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require network coverage. To make calls, you must first activate the phone function by changing profiles. If the device has been locked, enter the lock code.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 23 Warning: Yo ur de vi ce m us t b e s wi tc he d o n t o us e Offline profile. Do not switch the device on when wireless device use is proh ibited or when it may cause interference or danger. To leave the Offline profile, press , and select Tools > Profiles , select another profile, and select Options > Activate > Yes . The phone re-enables wireless transmissions (providing th ere is sufficient signal strength). If a Bluetooth co nnection is activated before entering the Offline profile, it will be deactivated. A Bluetooth connection is auto matically reactivated after leaving the Offline profile. See "Bluetooth connection settings" , p. 99 . Transfer content from another device You can copy contacts, calend ar, images, video, and sound clips using a Bluetooth connection, from a compatible Nokia Series 60 device. You can use your Nokia N90 device without a SIM card. The offline profile is automa tically activated when the device is switched on withou t a SIM card. This allows you to use the SIM card in another device. To avoid duplicate entries, you can transfer the same type of information, for example, contacts, from the other device to your Nokia N90 only once. Before starting the transfer, you must activate Bluetooth connectivity on both devices. On each device, press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth . Select Bluetooth > On . Give a name to each device. To transfer content: 1 Press , and select Tools > Transfer on your Nokia N90. Follow the instructions on the screen. 2 The device searches for devices with Bluetooth connectivity. When it has fi nished the search, select your other phone from the list. 3 You are asked to enter a code on your Nokia N90. Enter a code (1-16 digits), and select OK . Enter the same code on the other phone, and select OK . 4 The Transfer application is sent to the other phone as a message. 5 Open the message to install Transfer on the other phone, and follow the inst ructions on the screen. 6 From your Nokia N90, select the content you want to copy from the other phone.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 24 Content is copied from the me mory and memory card of the other phone to your No kia N90 and memory card. Copying time depends on th e amount of data to be transferred. You can cancel co pying and continue later. The Transfer application is added to the main menu of the other phone. Change the look of your device To change the look of your phone displays, such as the wallpaper and icons, press , and select Tools > Themes . The active theme is indicated by . In Themes you can group together elements from other themes or select images from the Gallery to personalise themes further. The themes on the memory card are indicated by . The themes on the memory card are not available if the memory card is not inserted in the phone. If you want to use the themes saved in th e memory card without the memory card, save the themes in the phone memory first. See also "Cover display settings" , p. 116 . To open a browser connection and download more themes, select Theme downloads . To activate a theme, sc roll to it, and select Options > Apply . To preview a theme, sc roll to it, and select Options > Preview . To edit themes, scroll to a theme, and select Options > Edit to change the following options: ⢠Wallpaper âÂÂThe image to be shown as a background image in the standby mode. ⢠Power saver âÂÂThe power saver type on the main display: date and time, or a text you have written yourself. See also Power saver time-out , p. 107 . ⢠Image in 'Go to' âÂÂThe background image for the Go to application. To restore the selected theme ba ck to its original settings, select Options > Restore orig. theme when you edit a theme. Active standby mode Use your standby main display for fast access to your most frequently used applications. By default, the active standby mode is on. Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby , and press to switch the active standby on or off.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Personalise your device 25 The active standby display is shown with default applications across the top of the screen, and calendar, to-do, and player events listed below. Scroll to an application or event, and press . The standard scroll key shortcuts available in the standby mode cannot be used when the active standby mode is on. To change the default applications shortcuts: 1 Press , select Tools > Settings > Phone > Standby mode > Active standby apps. , and press . 2 Highlight a shortcut to an application, and select Options > Change . 3 Select a new application from the list, and press . Some shortcuts may be fixed, and you are not able to change them.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 26 Make calls Voice calls Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, press or . If you have set the volume to Mute , you cannot adjust the volume with the scroll key. To adjust the volume, select Unmute , and then press or . 1 In the standby mode, en ter the phone number, including the area code. Press to remove a number. For international calls, press twice for the character (replaces the international access code), and enter the country code, area code (omit the leading zero if necessary), and phone number. 2 Press to call the number. 3 Press to end the call (or to cancel the call attempt). Pressing always ends a call, even if another application is active. Activating the Fold closed mode during an active call ends the call unless you have acti vated the loudspeaker or a headset. To make a call from Contacts , press , and select Contacts . Scroll to the desired name, or enter the first letters of the name to the sear ch field. Matching contacts are listed. To call, press or select Options > Call > Voice call . If there is more than one number listed for the contact, scroll to the number you want to call and select Call . You must copy the contacts from your SIM to Contacts before you can make a call this way. See "Copy contacts" , p. 38 . To call your voice mailbox ( ) , press and hold in the standby mode. See also "Call diverting" , p. 114 . Tip! To change the phone number of your voice mailbox, press , and select Tools > Voice mail > Options > Change number . Enter the number (obtained from your service provider), and select OK . To call a recently dialled nu mber in the standby mode, press to access a list of the 20 last numbers you called or attempted to call. Scroll to the number you want, and press to call the number.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 27 Make a conference call 1 Make a call to the first participant. 2 To make a call to another participant, select Options > New call . The first call is auto matically put on hold. 3 When the new call is answered, to join the first participant in the conference call, select Options > Conference . To add a new person to the call, repeat step 2, and select Options > Conference > Add to conference . Your device supports conference calls between a maximum of six participan ts, including yourself. To have a private conversation with one of the participants, select Options > Conference > Private . Select a participant, and select Private . The conference call is put on hold on your device. The other participants can still contin ue the conference call. Once you have finished the private conversation, select Options > Add to conference to return to the conference call. To drop a participant, select Options > Conference > Drop participant , scroll to the participant, and select Drop . 4 To end the active conference call, press . Speed dial a phone number To activate speed dialling, press , and select Tools > Settings > Call > Speed dialling > On . To assign a phone number to on e of the speed dialling keys ( â ), press , and select Tools > Speed dial . Scroll to the key to which you want to assign the phone number, and select Options > Assign . is reserved for the voice mailbox. To call in the standby mode, press the speed dial key and . Voice dialling Your device supports enhanced voice commands. Enhanced voice commands are not dependent on the speakerâÂÂs voice, so the user do es not record voice tags in advance. Instead, the device creates a voice tag for the entries in contacts, and compar es the spoken voice tag to it. The voice recognition in th e device adapts to the main userâÂÂs voice to recognise the voice commands better. The voice tag for a contact is the name or nickname that is saved on the contact card. To listen to the synthesised voice tag, open a contact card, and select Options > Play voice tag .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 28 Make a call with a voice tag Note: Using voice tags may be difficult in a noisy environment or during an emergency, so you should not rely solely upon voice dialing in all circumstances. When you use voice dialling, the loudspeaker is in use. Hold the device at a shor t distance away when you say the voice tag. 1 To start voice dialling, pre ss and hold the capture key. If you are using a compatible headset with the headset key, press and hold the he adset key to start voice dialling. 2 A short tone is played, and Speak now is displayed. Say clearly the name or nickna me that is saved on the contact card. 3 The device plays a synthesised voice tag for the recognised contact in the selected device language, and displays the name and number. After a timeout of 1.5 seconds, the devi ce dials the number. If the recognised contact was not correct, select Next to view a list of other matches, or Quit to cancel voice dialling. If several numbers are saved under the name, the device selects the default number, if it has been set. Otherwise the device selects the firs t available number of the following: Mobile , Mobile (home), Mobile (business), Telephone , Tel. (home) , and Tel. (business) . Video calls When you make a video call, you can see a real-time, two-way video between you and the recipient of the call. The live video image, or the selected still image captured by the camera in your device is shown to the video call recipient. To be able to make a video ca ll, you must have a USIM card and be in the coverage of a UMTS network. For availability of and subscription to video call services, contact your network operator or service provider. A video call can only be made between two parties. The video call can be made to a compatible mobile phone or an ISDN client. Video calls cannot be made while there is another voice, video, or data call active. Warning! You cannot make emergency calls in the Imaging mode because the ke ypad is not active. To make an emergency call, activate the Fold open mode.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 29 Icons: You are not receiving vide o (the recipient is not sending video or the network is not transmitting it). You have denied video sending from your device. To send a still image instead, see "Call settings" , p. 107 . 1 To start a video call, in the Fold open mode, enter the phone number in the standby mode, or select Contacts , and select a contact. 2 Select Options > Call > Video call . 3 Activate the Imaging mode after the call recipient has answered the call. Starting a video call may take a while. Waiting for image is shown. If the call is not successful (for example, video calls are not supported by th e network, or the receiving device is not compatible) you are asked if you want to try a normal call or send a message instead. The video call is active when you see two video images, and hear the sound through the lo udspeaker. The call recipient may deny video sending ( ), in which case you hear the sound and may see a still image or a grey background graphic. Tip! To increase or decrease the volume during a call, in the Fold open mode, press or , or in the Imaging mode, move the joystick left or right. To change between showing vi deo or hearing only sound, select Enable / Disable > Sending video (Imaging mode only), Sending audio or Sending audio & video (Imaging mode only). To send live video image of yo urself, turn the camera unit so that the lens is facing you. To zoom your own image, move the joystick up and down to zoom in and zoom out. Th e zoom indicator is shown on the top of the display. To switch the places of th e sent video images on the display, select Change image order . If you activate the Fold open mode during a video call, sending your own video image stops because the camera is not active. You can, however, still see the video of the recipient. Note: Even if you have denied video sending during a video call, the call will still be charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your network operator or service provider. To end the video call, press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 30 Video sharing Use Video sharing to send live video or a video clip from your mobile device to anothe r compatible mobile device during a voice call. Simply invi te a recipient to view the live video, or a video clip you wa nt to share. Sharing begins automatically when the recipi ent accepts the invitation, and you activate the correct mode. See "Share video" , p. 31 . Video sharing requirements Because Video sharing requires a 3G Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS) connection, your ability to use Video sharing depends on 3G network availability. Contact your se rvice provider for questions about network availability and fees associated with using this application. To use Video sharing you must: â¢E n s u r e t h a t Video sharing is installed on your Nokia N90. ⢠Ensure that your device is set up for person-to-person connections. See "Settings" , p. 30 . ⢠Ensure you have an active UMTS connection and are within UMTS network coverage. See "Settings" , p. 30 . If you start the sharing sessi on while you are within UMTS network coverage and a handover to GSM occurs, the sharing session is discontinued, but your voice call continues. ⢠Ensure that both the sender and recipient are registered to the UTMS network. If you invite someone to a sharing session and th at person has his phone turned off, is not within UMTS network coverage, or does not have video sharin g installed or person-to- person connections set up, they do not know that you are sending an invitation. However, you receive an error message that the recipient cannot accept the invitation. Settings Person-to-person connection settings A person-to-person connection is also known as a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) connec tion. The SIP profile settings must be configured in your device before you can use Video sharing . Setting up a SIP pr ofile allows you to establish a live person-to-pe rson connection to another compatible phone. The SIP prof ile must also be established to receive a sharing session. Ask your network operator or service provider for the SIP profile settings, and save th em in your device. Your network operator or service provider may send you the settings over the air.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 31 If you know a recipientâÂÂs SIP address, you can enter it on your contact card fo r that person. Open Contacts from your device main menu, and ope n the contact card (or start a new card for that person). Select Options > Add detail > Web address . Enter the SIP address in a format sip:username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). UTMS connection settings To set up your UMTS co nnection, do the following: ⢠Contact your service pr ovider to establish an agreement for you to use the UMTS network. ⢠Ensure that your device UM TS access point connection settings are configured properly. For help, see "Connection settings" , p. 108 . Share video To receive a sharing session, the recipient must install Video sharing and configure the required settings on their mobile device. You and the recipient must both be registered to the service be fore you can start sharing. To receive share invitations, you must be registered to the service, have an active UMTS connection, and be within the UMTS network coverage. Live video 1 When a voice call is active, select Options > Share video > Live . 2 The phone sends the invitati on to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. If the recipient has several SIP addresses in the contact card, select the SIP address to which you want to send the invitation, and Select to send the invitation. If the SIP address of the reci pient is not available, enter a SIP address. Select OK to send the invitation. 3 Sharing begins automatically when the recipient accepts the invitation, and you activate the Imaging mode. See "Imaging mode" , p. 12 . When you activate the Imaging mode, the loudspeaker is active. You can also use a headset to continue your voice call while you share live video. 4 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Continue to resume sharing. 5 To end the sharing session, in the Imaging mode, return to the Fold open mode. To end the voice call, press the End key. Video clip 1 When a voice call is active, select Options > Share video > Clip . A list of video clips opens.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 32 2 Select a video clip you want to share. A preview view opens. To preview the clip, select Options > Play . 3 Select Options > Invite . You may need to convert the video clip into a suitable format to be able to share it. Clip must be converted for sharing. Continue? appears. Select OK . The phone sends the invitati on to the SIP address you have added to the contact card of the recipient. In case the recipient has se veral SIP addresses in the contact card, select the SIP address to which you want to send the invitation, and Select to send the invitation. If the SIP address of the reci pient is not available, enter a SIP address. Select OK to send the invitation. 4 Sharing begins automaticall y in the Fold open mode when the recipient acce pts the invitation. See "Fold open mode" , p. 11 . 5 Select Pause to pause the sharing session. Select Options > Continue to resume sharing. 6 To end the sharing session, select Stop . To end the voice call, press the End key. Accept an invitation When someone sends you a share invitation, an invitation message is displayed showing the senderâÂÂs name or SIP address. If your device is not set to Silent , it rings when you receive an invitation. If someone sends you a share invitation and you are not within UMTS network coverage, you will not know that you received an invitation. When you receive an invitation, you can select: ⢠Accept to begin the sharing se ssion. If the sender wants to share live video, activate the Imaging mode. ⢠Reject to decline the invitation . The sender receives a message that you rejected th e invitation. You can also press the End key to declin e the sharing session and disconnect the voice call. To disconnect the session, when sharing a live video, return to the Fold open mode. If yo u share a video clip, select Exit . Sharing ended is displayed. Answer or reject a call To answer the call in the Fold open mode, press . If Anykey answer is set to On , to answer a call in the Fold closed mode, open the fold, and the call starts automatically. Otherwise, open the fold, and press . To answer a call, and use the loud speaker in the Fold closed mode, select Answer () . To mute the ringing tone wh en a call comes in, select Silence .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 33 Tip! If a compatible headset is connected to the device, to answer and end a call, press the headset key. If you do not want to answer a call, in the Fold open mode, press to reject it. In th e Fold closed mode, select Reject . The caller hears a line busy to ne. If you have activated the Call divert settings > If busy function to divert calls, rejecting an incoming call also diverts the call. See "Call diverting" ,p . 114 . When you reject an incoming call in the Fold open mode, you can also send a text message to the caller informing why you cannot answer the call. Select Options > Send text message . You can edit the text before sending it. To set up this option and write a standard text message, see "Call settings" , p. 107 . If you answer a voice call during a video call, the video call is dropped. Call waiting is not available during a video call. Answer or reject a video call When a video call arrives, is displayed. Tip! You can assign a ringin g tone for video calls. Press and select Tools > Profiles , select a profile and Options > Personalise > Video call tone . In the Fold open mode, press to answer the video call. To start sending video, acti vate the Imaging mode, and a live video image, recorded video clip, or the image being captured by the camera in yo ur device is shown to the caller. If you want to send a live video image, turn the camera unit to the direction from which you want to send the video image. If you do no t activate the Imaging mode, video sending is not possible , but you can still hear the other person. A grey screen is shown in place of the video. To replace the grey screen with a still image, see "Call settings" , Image in video call , p. 107 . Tip! To send video of yourself, in the Imaging mode turn the camera unit so that the lens is facing you. If you activate the Fold open mode during a video call, sending your own video image stops because the camera is not active. You can, however, still see the video of the recipient. Note: Even if you have denied video sending during a video call, the call will still be charged as a video call. Check the pricing with your network operator or service provider. To end the video call, in the Imaging mode or in the Fold open mode, press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 34 Call waiting You can answer a call while you have another call in progress if you have activated Call waiting in Tools > Settings > Call > Call waiting . To answer the waiting call, pre ss . The first call is put on hold. To switch between the two calls, select Swap . Select Options > Transfer to connect an incoming call or a call on hold with an active call and to disconnect yourself from the calls. To end the active call, press . To end both calls, select Options > End all calls . Options during a voice call Many of the options that you can use during a voice call are network services. Select Options during a call for some of the following options: Mute or Unmute , Answer, Reject , Swap , Hold or Unhold , Activate handset , Activate loudsp. , or Activate handsfree (if a compatible headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached), End active call or End all calls , New call , Conference , and Transfer. Select from the following: Replace âÂÂTo end an active call and replace it by answering the waiting call. Send MMS (in UMTS networks only)âÂÂTo send an image or a video in a multimedia messa ge to the other participant of the call. You can edit the message and change the recipient before sending. Pre ss to send the file to a compatible device ( ). Send DTMF âÂÂTo send DTMF tone strings, for example, a password. Enter the DTMF stri ng or search for it in Contacts . To enter a wait character ( w ) or a pause character ( p ), press repeatedly. Select OK to send the tone. Tip! You can add DTMF tones to the Phone number or DTMF fields in a contact card. Options during a video call Select Options during a video call for the following options: Enable or Disable (audio in the Fold open mode; video, audio, or both in the Imaging mode), Activate handset (if a headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached), Activate loudsp. , or Activate handsfree (Fold open mode only, and if a headset with Bluetooth connectivity is attached), End active call , Change image order , Zoom in / Zoom out (Imaging mode only), and Help .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 35 Log Recent calls To monitor the phone numbers of missed, received, and dialled calls, press , and select My own > Log > Recent calls . The device registers missed and received calls only if the network supports these functions, the device is switched on, and within the network service area. Tip! When you see a note in the standby mode about missed calls, select Show to access the list of missed calls. To call back, scroll to a name or number, and press . To clear all recent call lists, select Options > Clear recent calls in the recent calls main vi ew. To clear one of the call registers, open the register yo u want to erase, and select Options > Clear list . To clear an individual event, open a register, scroll to the event, and press . Call duration To monitor the approximate duration of your incoming and outgoing calls, press , and select My own > Log > Call duration . To set the call duration to sh ow on the display each time a call is active, select My own > Log > Options > Settings > Show call duration . Select Yes or No . Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off fo r billing, and so forth. To clear call duration timers, select Options > Clear timers . For this you need the lock code, see "Security" , "Phone and SIM" , p. 111 . Packet data To check the amount of data sent and received during packet data connection s, press , and select My own > Log > Packet data . For example, you may be charged for your packet data connections by the amount of data sent and received. Monitor all communication events Icons in Log : Incoming Outgoing Missed communication events
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Make calls 36 To monitor all voice and video calls, text messages, or data connections registered by the device, press , select My own > Log , and press to open the general log. For each communication event, you can see the sender or recipient name, phone number, name of the service provider, or access point. You can filter the general log to view just one type of event and create new contact cards based on the log information. Tip! If you want to see the dura tion of a voice call on the main display during an active call, select Options > Settings > Show call duration > Yes . Tip! To view a list of sent messages, press , and select Messaging > Sent . Subevents, such as a text me ssage sent in more than one part and packet data connections, are logged as one communication event. Conn ections to your mailbox, multimedia messaging centre, or Web pages are shown as packet data connections. To filter the log, select Options > Filter and a filter. To erase the contents of the l og, recent calls register, and messaging delivery reports permanently, select Options > Clear log . Select Yes to confirm. To set the Log duration , select Options > Settings > Log duration . The log events remain in the phone memory for a set number of days after which they are automatically erased to free memory. If you select No log , all the log contents, recent calls regist er, and messaging delivery reports are permanently deleted. To view the details of a co mmunication event, in the general log view scroll to an ev ent, and press the scroll key. Tip! In the details view you can copy a phone number to the clipboard, and paste it to a text message, for example. Select Options > Copy Number . Packet data counter and connection timer : To view how much data, measured in kiloby tes, is transferred and how long a certain packet data conn ection lasts, scroll to an incoming or outgoing event indicated by Pack. , and select Options > View details .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) 37 Contacts (Phonebook) Press , and select Contacts . In Contacts you can add a personal ringing tone or a thumbnail image to a contact card. You can also create co ntact groups, which allow you to sen d t ex t m es sag es or e- mai l t o m an y r ec ipi en ts at th e same time. You can add rece ived contact information (business cards) to contacts. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . Contact information can only be sent to or received from compatible devices. Tip! Regularly back up the phone information to the memory card. You can restore the information, such as contacts, to the phone later. See "Memory card tool" , p. 18 . You can also use Nokia PC Suite to back up your contacts to a compatible PC. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Options in Contacts are Open , Call , Create message , New contact , Open conversation , Edit , Delete , Duplicate , Add to group , Belongs to groups , Mark/ Unmark , Copy / Copy to SIM direct. , SIM contacts , Go to web address , Send , Memory details , Settings , Help , and Exit . Save names and numbers 1 Select Options > New contact . 2 Fill in the fields that you want, and select Done . Tip! If you use video sharing with a contact, save the contactâÂÂs session initiation protocol (SIP) address to the Web address field of the contact card. Enter the SIP address in the format sip:username@domainname (you can use an IP address instead of a domain name). To edit contact cards in Contacts , scroll to the contact card you want to edit, and select Options > Edit . To delete a contact card in Contacts , select a card, and press . To delete several cont act cards at the same time, press and to mark the contacts, and press to delete. Tip! To add and edit cont act cards, use Nokia Contacts Editor available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. To attach a small thumbnail im age to a contact card, open the contact card, and select Options > Edit > Options > Add thumbnail . The thumbnail image is shown when the contact calls.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) 38 Tip! Speed dialling is a quick way to call frequently used numbers. You can assign speed dialling keys to eight phone numbers. See "Speed dial a phone number" , p. 27 . Tip! To send contact informat ion, select the card you want to send. Select Options > Send > Via text message , Via multimedia , or Via Bluetooth . See "Messaging" , p. 63 and "Send data using a Bluetooth connection" , p. 99 . Default numbers and addresses You can assign default number s or addresses to a contact card. In this way if a contact has several numbers or addresses, you can easily call or send a message to the contact to a certain number or address. The default number is also used in voice dialling. 1 In contacts, select a contact, and press . 2 Select Options > Defaults . 3 Select a default to which you want to add a number or an address, and select Assign . 4 Select a number or an addr ess you want to set as a default. The default number or address is underlined in the contact card. Copy contacts If you have phone numbers st ored on the SIM card, copy them to Contacts . Entries that are saved only on the SIM card are not shown in the co ntacts directory, and for incoming calls and messages, the device cannot match the number to the name. When a new SIM card is inse rted in the device and you open Contacts for the first time, you are asked if you want to copy the contact entries on the SIM card to the device memory. Select Yes to copy the entries to your contacts directory. To copy individual names an d numbers from a SIM card to your device, press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory . Select the names you want to copy and Options > Copy to Contacts . To copy contacts to your SIM card, press , and select Contacts . Select the names yo u want to copy and Options > Copy to SIM direct. , or Options > Copy > To SIM directory . Only the contact card fields supported by your SIM card are copied. Tip! You can synchronise your contacts to a compatible PC with Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) 39 SIM directory and other SIM services For availability and in formation on using SIM card services, contact your SIM card vendor . This may be the service provider, network operator, or other vendor. Press , and select Contacts > Options > SIM contacts > SIM directory to see the names and numbers stored on the SIM card. In the SIM directory you can add, edit, or copy numbers to contacts, an d you can make calls. To view the list of fixed dialling numbers, select Options > SIM contacts > Fixed dialling contacts . This setting is only shown if supporte d by your SIM card. To restrict calls from your phone to selected phone numbers, select Options > Activ. fixed dialling . To add new numbers to the fixed dialling list, select Options > New SIM contact . You need the PIN2 code for these functions. When you use Fixed dialling , packet data connections are not possible, except when se nding text messages over a packet data connection. In th is case, the message centre number and the recipientâ s phone number must be included on the fixed dialling list. When fixed dialing is activated, calls may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Add ringing tones for contacts When a contact or group me mber calls you, the phone plays the chosen ringing tone (if the callerâÂÂs telephone number is sent with the call and your phone recognises it). 1 Press to open a contact ca rd, or go to the groups list, and select a contact group. 2 Select Options > Ringing tone . A list of ringing tones opens. 3 Select the ringing tone you wish to use for the individual contact or the selected group. To remove the ringing tone, select Default tone from the list of ringing tones. Create contact groups Options in the groups list view are Open , New group , Delete , Rename , Ringing tone , Memory details , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 In Contacts , press to open the groups list. 2 Select Options > New group . 3 Write a name for the group or use the default name Group , and select OK . 4 Open the group, and select Options > Add members .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Contacts (Phonebook) 40 5 Scroll to a contact, and pr ess to mark it. To add multiple members at a time, repeat this action on all the contacts you want to add. 6 Select OK to add the contacts to the group. To rename a group, select Options > Rename , enter the new name, and select OK . Remove members from a group 1 In the groups list, open th e group you want to modify. 2 Scroll to the contact, and select Options > Remove from group . 3 Select Yes to remove the contact from the group. Tip! To check to which grou ps a contact belongs, scroll to the contact, and select Options > Belongs to groups .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 41 Camera and Gallery Camera The Nokia N90 device su pports an image capture resolution of 1600 x 1200 pi xels. The image resolution in these materials may appear different. To activate the camera, activate the Imaging mode. See "Imaging mode" , p. 12 . The camera starts, and you can see the view to be captured. Warning! You cannot make emergency calls in the Imaging mode because the keypad is not active. To make an emergency call, activate the Fold open mode. If the camera is in Video mode , open the image mode by selecting Options > Image mode . The images are automatically sa ved in the gallery in .jpeg format. You can send images in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment or using a Bluetooth connection. Take pictures in the Imaging mode To make lighting and colour adjustments before taking a picture, press the jo ystick, and select Flash , White balance , Exposure value , or Colour tone . See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . To select a scene, press the joystick, and select Scene . See "Scenes" , p. 44 . Your device also has a swin g axis camera, which makes capturing views in different si tuations easier. You can turn the camera unit clockwise and counterclockwise. See "Camera mode" , p. 13 . Options before taking a picture are Video mode , Go to Gallery , Image setup , Sequence mode / Normal mode , Activate self-timer , Settings , and Help . To lock the focus on an ob ject, press the capture key halfway down. The green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus wa s not locked, the red locked focus indicator appears. Release the capture key, and press it again halfway down. You can, however, take the picture without locking the focus.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 42 To take a picture, press the capture key. Do not move the device before the image is saved. The image is saved automatically in the Images & video folder of Gallery . See "Gallery" , p. 54 . Tip! You can also take pictures conveniently in the Camera mode. See "Take pictures in the Camera mode" , p. 46 . Imaging mode camera indicators show the following: ⢠The phone memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where images are saved. ⢠The images indicator (2) estimates how many images, depending on the selected image quality, can fit in the remaining memory of your de vice or the memory card. ⢠The scene indicator (3) sh ows the active scene. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . ⢠The flash indicator (4) shows if the flash is set to Automatic () , Red eye redu. () , Forced () , o r Off () . ⢠The green focus indicator (5) is displayed when the focus point is locked by the viewfinder (not visible in sequence mode). ⢠The self-timer indicator (6) shows that the self-timer is activated. See "You in the pictureâÂÂself- timer" , p. 43 . ⢠The sequence mode indicator (7) shows that the sequence mode is active. See "Take pictures in a sequence" , p. 43 . ⢠The resolution indicator (8) shows the selected image quality. See "Adjust still image camera settings" , p. 45 Shortcuts are as follows: ⢠Press the joystick up and down to zoom in and zoom out. The zoom indicator, which appears on the side pane, shows the zoom level. ⢠Press the joystick to enter the Image setup settings. See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . ⢠Press the joystick left or ri ght to change the flash mode. Saving the captured image may take longer if you change the zoom, lighting, or colour settings. When taking a picture, note the following: ⢠It is recommended to use both hands to keep the camera still. ⢠To take images or record video in different environments, use the proper scene for each environment. See "Scenes" , p. 44 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 43 ⢠To make lighting and colour adjustments before taking a picture, press the joystick, or select Options > Image setup > Scene , Flash , White balance , Exposure value , or Colour tone . See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . ⢠The quality of a zoomed pict ure is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. ⢠The camera goes into battery saving mode if there are no key presses in a while. To continue taking pictures, press the capture key. After the image is taken, note the following: ⢠If you do not want to keep the image, select Options > Delete . ⢠To return to the viewfinder to take a new picture, press the capture key halfway down. â¢T o s e n d t h e i m a g e Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth , select Options > Send . For more information, see "Messaging" , p. 63 and "Bluetooth connection" , p. 98 . This option is not available during an active call. ⢠To send an image to the other party during an active call, select Options > Send to caller . ⢠To edit the picture, select Options > Edit . See "Edit images" , p. 47 . ⢠To print the picture, select Options > Print . See "Image print" , p. 57 . Take pictures in a sequence Select Options > Sequence mode to set the camera to take six pictures in a sequ ence. You can also use the sequence mode with the Activate self-timer . See "You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer" , p. 43 . The pictures are automatically saved in Gallery . To take the pictures, press and hold the capture key. If you want to take less than six pictures, release the capture key after the desired amount of pictures. After taking the pictures, they are shown in a grid on the main display. To view a pictur e, press the joystick to open it. To return to the sequence mode viewfinder, press the capture key halfway down. You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer Use the self-timer to delay the taking of a picture so that you can include yourself in the picture. To set the self-timer delay, select Options > Activate self-timer > 2 seconds or 10 seconds . To activate the self-timer, select Activate . The self-timer indicator ( ) blinks and the device beeps when the timer is running. The camera takes the picture after the selected delay has elapsed. You can also use the Activate self-timer in the sequence mode. See "Take pictures in a sequence" , p. 43 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 44 Tip! Select Options > Activate self-timer > 2 seconds to keep your hand steady when taking a picture. Flashlight Keep a safe distance when using the flash. Do not use the flash on people or animals at close range. Do not cover the flash while taking a picture. The camera has an LED flashlig ht for low light conditions. The following flashlight modes are available: Automatic () , Red eye redu. () , Forced () , a n d Off () . Select Options > Image setup > Flash > Forced to use the flashlight. If the flashlight is set to Off or Automatic during bright conditions, the flashlight stil l emits a low light when an image is captured. This allows the subject of the picture to see when the picture is taken. There is no flashlight effect on the resultant picture. If the flashlight is set to Red eye redu. , it decreases the redness of the eyes in the picture. Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting To enable the camera to re produce colours and lighting more accurately, or to add e ffects to your pictures or videos, select Options > Image setup or Video setup , and select from the fo llowing options: Scene âÂÂSelect a proper scene for the environment in which you are taking pictures. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . Every scene uses its own lighting settings that have been adjusted according to a certain kind of environment. Flash (images only)âÂÂSet the flash to Automatic , Red eye redu. , Forced , or Off . See "Flashlight" , p. 44 . White balance âÂÂSelect the current lig hting condition from the list. This allows the came ra to reproduce colours more accurately. Exposure value (images only)âÂÂAdjust the exposure time of the camera. Colour tone âÂÂSelect a colour effect from the list. The screen display changes to match any settings made, showing you how the change affe cts the pictures or videos. The settings return to the defa ult settings when you close the camera. If you select a new scene, the settings are replaced by the settings of the selected scene. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . If you, however, need to change the setup settings, you can change th em after selecting a scene. Scenes A scene helps you to find the right colour and lighting settings for the current enviro nment. Select a proper scene for taking pictures or record ing video clips from a scenes list. The settings of each scen e have been set according to a certain style, or environmen t in which the pictures are
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 45 taken. Select Options > Image setup / Video setup > Scene : Video scenes Normal ( )(default)âÂÂUse this scene in all conditions. Night ( )âÂÂUse this scene in low light conditions. Image scenes Automatic ( ) (default)âÂÂUse this scene in all conditions. Close-up mode ( )âÂÂUse this scene for close up photography. Night ( )âÂÂUse this scene in low light conditions. Sports ( )âÂÂUse this scene to take pictures of fast moving objects. Note that wh en you use this scene, the resolution of the images is reduced from 1600x1200 to 800x600. See Image quality , p. 45 . Portrait ( )âÂÂUse this scene to take portrait pictures, such as head shots and sitting poses. Landscape ( )âÂÂUse this scene when you take pictures of objects that are further away. User defined ( )âÂÂUse this scene to create a personalised scene with your own flash, wh ite balance, exposure value, and colour tone settings. When taking pictures, the default scene is Automatic . If you, however, select the User defined scene, it is set as the default scene. To make your own scene suitable for a certain environment, select User defined scene. In the user scene you can adjust Based on scene , Flash, White balance, Exposure value , Colour tone , and Reset user scene options. To copy the settings of another scene, select Based on scene and the desired scene. Adjust still image camera settings There are two kinds of setting s for the still image camera in the Imaging mode: Image setup settings and main settings. To adjust Image setup settings, see "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . The setup settings return to the default settings after you close the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Image quality â High 2M - Print (resolution 1600x1200), Med. 0.5M - Email (resolution 800x600), or Low 0.3M - MMS (resolution 640x480). The better the image quality, the more memory the image consumes. The quality of a zoomed picture is lower than that of a nonzoomed picture. If you want to print the image, select High 2M - Print . If you want to send it through e-mail, select Med. 0.5M -
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 46 Email . To send the image through MMS, select Low 0.3M - MMS . Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the image to a certain album in the gallery. If you select Yes , a list of available albums opens. Show focus point (image only)âÂÂSelect Yes i f y o u w a n t t h e focus point to be visible on the main display when taking a picture. Show captured image âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to see the captured image after it is taken, or No if you want to continue taking pi ctures immediately. Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your images. Take pictures in the Camera mode The camera in the Camera mode can be activated and used also during an active call. 1 To activate the Camera mode, turn the camera unit in the Fold closed mode. See "Camera mode" , p. 13 . The active keypad lock is deactivated, and the viewfinder appears on the cover display. To zoom in or zoom out, mo ve the joystick to the right or to the left. 2 To lock the focus on an ob ject, press the capture key halfway down. The green locked focus indicator appears on the display. If the focus was not locked, the red locked focus indicator ap pears. Release the capture key, and press it again halfway down. You can, however, take the picture without locking the focus. 3 To take the picture, press the capture key all the way down. The picture is automati cally saved in the gallery. See "Gallery" , p. 54 . To keep the image on the disp lay after taking it, hold the capture key down. To return to the viewfinder, release the capture key. Camera mode indicators show the following: ⢠The mode indicator (1) shows the active scene. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . ⢠The phone memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (2) show where images are saved. ⢠The images indicator (3) estimates how many images, depending on the
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 47 selected image quality, can fit in the remaining memory of your device or the memory card. ⢠The green focus indicator (4) is displayed when the focus point is locked by the viewfinder. ⢠The self-timer indicator (5) shows that the self-timer is activated. See "You in the pictureâÂÂself-timer" , p. 43 . ⢠The flash indicator (6) show s if the flash is set to Automatic () , Red eye redu. () , Forced () , o r Off ( ). Select between the fl ash modes by moving the joystick up or down. You can see the flash mode in the pop-up window on the display. ⢠The zoom indicator (7) shows the zoom level. Move the joystick left and right to zoom in and zoom out. ⢠The joystick indicator ( ) (8) indicates that the Options menu is available. Pr ess the joystick to open the Options menu. To close the camera in the Came ra mode, return to the Fold closed mode by turning the camera unit. See "Fold closed mode" , p. 12 . Camera mode options To adjust the image settings, press the joystick, and select from the following options: Shooting mode âÂÂTo select a proper scene for the image capturing environment. See "Scenes" , p. 44 . Flip view âÂÂTo flip the picture 180 degrees. You need this option when you take a pictur e, for example, of yourself; when you turn the camera unit so that it is facing you, the viewfinder is upside down. Self-timer âÂÂTo activate the self-timer. Select 2 seconds or 10 seconds . Exposure value âÂÂTo adjust the brightness of the picture. Settings âÂÂTo adjust the Image quality , Memory in use , and Show captured img. settings. See "Adjust still image camera settings" , p. 45 . Edit images To edit the pictures after taki ng them, or the ones already saved in Gallery , select Options > Edit . You can open the Gallery application in the Imagin g mode or in the Fold open mode. Options in the edit main view are Apply effect , Close edit , Undo , Send , Full screen / Normal screen , Zoom in / Zoom out , Save , Print and Help . Select Apply effect to, for example, crop and rotate the image; adjust the brightne ss, colour, contrast, and resolution; and add effects, text , clip art, or a frame to the picture. To crop an image, select Options > Apply effect > Crop . Select Manual to crop the image size manually, or select a
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 48 predefined aspect ratio from the list. If you select Manual , a cross appears on the upper le ft corner of the image. To move the cross, and select the area to be cropped, move the joystick. Select Set . Another cross appears on the lower right corner. Select again th e area to be cropped, and select Crop . The selected areas form the cropped image. To reduce redness of the eyes in an image, select Options > Apply effect > Red eye reduction . Move the cross onto the eye, and press the joysti ck. A loop appears on the display. To resize the loop to fit the size of the eye, move the joystick. Press the joys tick to reduce the redness. To add clip art to an image, select Options > Apply effect > Clip-art . Select the item you want to add from the list, and press the joystick. To move, rotate, and change the size of the item, select Options > Move , Resize , or Rotate . To add text to an image, select Options > Apply effect > Text . Enter the text, and select OK . To edit the text, select Options > Move , Resize , Rotate , or Select colour . Shortcuts in the Fold open mode: ⢠To view an image in full sc reen, press . To return to the normal view, press again. ⢠To rotate an image clockw ise or counterclockwise, press and . ⢠To zoom in or zoom out, press and . Tips on taking good photographs By turning the swing axis ca mera, capturing the views in demanding situations is easi er. You can turn the camera unit clockwise or co unterclockwise. See "Camera mode" , p. 13 . Picture quality Use the appropriate picture quality. The camera has three picture quality modes ( High 2M - Print , Med. 0.5M - Email , and Low 0.3M - MMS ). Use the High 2M - Print setting to make sure that the camera produces the best picture quality available. Note however, that better picture quality requires more storage space. For MMS and e-mail attachments it may be necessary to use the Med. 0.5M - Email or Low 0.3M - MMS setting. To define the quality in the image mode in the camera, select Options > Settings . Background Use a simple background. For portraits and other pictures with people, avoid having yo ur subject in front of a cluttered, complex background that may distract attention from the subject. Move the camera, or the subject, when these conditions cannot be met. Move the camera closer to the object to take clearer portraits.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 49 Depth When shooting landscapes and sceneries, add depth to your pictures by placing obje cts into the foreground. Note however, that if the foregr ound object is too close to camera, it may be blurred. Lighting conditions Changing the source, amount, and direction of light can change photographs dramatical ly. Here are some typical lighting conditions: ⢠Light source behind the subject. Avoid placing your subject in front of a strong light source. If the light source is behind the subject or visible in the display, the resulting picture may have weak contrast, may be too dark, and may contain unwanted light effects. You can also use the flashlight to add more lighting to shadows. See "Flashlight" , p. 44 . ⢠Sidelit subject. Strong side light gives a dramatic effect but may be too hars h, resulting in too much contrast. ⢠Light source in front of the subject. Harsh sunlight may cause the subjects to squint their eyes. The contrast may also be too high. ⢠Optimal lighting is found in situations where there is plenty of diffused, soft light available, for example, on a bright, partially cloudy da y or on a sunny day in the shadow of trees. Record videos To activate the camera and the viewfinder on the main display, activate the Imaging mode. See "Take pictures in the Imaging mode" , p. 41 . The camera starts, and you can see the view to be captured. If the camera is in Image mode , open the video recorder view by selecting Options > Video mode . To make lighting and colour adjustments before recording a video, press the joystick, and select White balance , or Colour tone . See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . To select a scene, press the joystick, and select Scene . See "Scenes" , p. 44 . Options before recording video are Image mode , Go to Gallery , Video setup , Settings , and Help . 1 Press the capture key to start recording. The record icon is shown. The LED flash is lit, and a tone sounds, indicating to the subject th at video is being recorded. There is no flash effect on the resultant video. 2 To pause recording at any time, select Pause . The pause icon blinks on the display. Video recording automatically stops if reco rding is set to pause and there are no key presses within a minute. 3 Select Continue to resume recording.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 50 4 Select Stop , or press the capture key to stop recording. The video clip is automatically saved to the Images & video folder of Gallery . See "Gallery" , p. 54 . Video recorder indicators show the following: ⢠The phone memory ( ) and memory card ( ) indicators (1) show where the video is saved. ⢠The current video length indicator (2) shows elapsed time and time remaining. ⢠The scene indicator (3) shows the acti ve scene. See "Scenes", p. 44 . ⢠The microphone indicator (4) shows that the microphone is muted. ⢠The file format indicator (5) indicates the format of the video clip according to the selected video quality . ⢠The video quality indicator (6) shows the selected video clip quality . See "Video settings" , p. 50 . Shortcuts are as follows: ⢠Press the joystick up or down to zoom in or zoom out. The zoom indicator, which appears on the side pane, shows the zoom level. ⢠Press the joystick to enter the Video setup settings. See "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . After a video clip is recorded: ⢠To immediately play the vide o clip you just recorded, select Options > Play . ⢠If you do not want to keep the video, select Options > Delete . ⢠To return to the vi ewfinder to record a new video, press the capture key. ⢠To send the video Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth , select Options > Send . For more information, see "Messaging" , p. 63 and "Bluetooth connection" , p. 98 . This option is not available during an active call. ⢠To send a video clip to the other party during an active call, select Options > Send to caller . ⢠To edit the video, select Options > Edit . See "Edit video clips" , p. 51 . Video settings There are two kinds of settings for the video recorder in the Imaging mode: Video setup settings and main settings. To adjust Video setup settings, see "Setup settingsâÂÂAdjust colour and lighting" , p. 44 . The setup settings return to the default settings after you cl ose the camera, but the main settings remain the same until you change them again. To
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 51 change the main settings, select Options > Settings and from the following: Audio recording âÂÂSelect On if you want to record both image and sound. Video quality âÂÂSet the quality of the video clip to High , Normal , or Sharing . The quality is indi cated with one of the following icons: (High), (Normal), or (Sharing). If you select High or Normal , the length of the video recording is restricted by the available space on your memory card, and up to 1 hour per clip. If you want to view the video on a TV or PC, select High video quality, which has CIF resolution (352x288) and file format .mp4. You cannot send video clips save d in the .mp4 format in a multimedia message. If you want to view the clip in mobile phones, select Normal , which has QCIF resolution (176x144) and file format .3 gp. To send the video clip through MMS, or send it th rough video sharing, select Sharing (QCIF resolution, file format .3gp). See "Video sharing" , p. 30 . The video clip is limited to 300 kB (approximately 20 seconds in du ration) so that it can be conveniently sent as a multimedia message to a compatible device. Some ne tworks, however, may only support sending of multimedia messages with a maximum size of 100 kB. Contact your service provider for more information. Add to album âÂÂSelect whether you want to save the recorded video clip to a certain album in Gallery . Selecting Yes opens a list of available albums. Show captured video âÂÂIf you select Yes , you can play the recorded video clip right after it is recorded by selecting Options > Play in the camera. If you select No , you can record a new video immediately. Memory in use âÂÂDefine the default memory store: phone memory or memory card. If the phone memory starts to get low, recording quality may decrease. To free phone memory, move data to a compatible memory card or a PC, or delete data. Tip! You can set the camera to use a compatible memory card for saving video by selecting Options > Settings > Memory in use > Memory card . Edit video clips You can edit video clips in Gallery in the Fold open mode or in the Imaging mode. See "Take pictures in the Imaging mode" , p. 41 , and "Gallery" , p. 54 . To edit video clips and create custom video clips, scroll to a video clip, and select Options > Edit . You can create custom video clips by combinin g and trimming video clips, and adding images, sound clips, transitions, and effects.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 52 Transitions are visual effects that you can add in the beginning and end of the video or between the video clips. In the video editor you can see two timelines: video clip timeline and sound clip timeli ne. If you add images, text, or transitions to a video clip, they are shown on the video clip timeline. To move on the ti melines, scroll left or right. To switch between the time lines, scroll up or down. Edit video, sound, image, text, and transitions To create custom video clips, mark and select one or more video clips, and select Options > Edit . In the Edit video view, you can insert video clips to make a custom video clip, and edit the clips by trimming and adding effects. You can add images and sound clips and change their duration, and also add text and transitions to the clip. Press and to move between the video clip and the sound clip. To modify the video, select from the following options: Edit video clip : Cut âÂÂTrims the video clip in the Cut video clip view. Add colour effect âÂÂInserts a colour ef fect on the video clip. Use slow motion âÂÂSlows the speed of the video clip. Mute sound / Unmute sound âÂÂMutes or unmutes the original video clip sound. Move (shown only if two or more video clips have been inserted)âÂÂMoves the video clip to the selected location. Remove âÂÂRemoves the video clip from the video. Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of the selected video clip. Edit text (shown only if you have added text)âÂÂTo move, remove or duplicate text; chan ge the colour and style of the text; define how long it stays on the screen; and add effects to the text. Edit image (shown only if you have added an image)âÂÂTo move, remove or duplicate an image; define how long it stays on the screen; and se t a background or a colour effect to the image. Edit sound clip : Cut âÂÂTrims the sound clip in the Cut sound clip view. Move (shown only if two or more sound clips have been inserted)âÂÂMoves the sound clip to the selected location. Set duration âÂÂChanges the length of the sound clip. Remove âÂÂRemoves the sound cl ip from the video.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 53 Duplicate âÂÂMakes a copy of the selected sound clip. Edit transition âÂÂThere are three types of transitions: at the start of a video, at the end of a video, and transitions between video clips. A start transition can be selected when the first transition of the video is active. Insert : Video clip âÂÂInserts the selected video clip. A thumbnail of the video clip is shown in the main view. A thumbnail consists of the first non-blac k view of the video clip. The name and length of the select ed video clip is also shown. Image âÂÂInserts the selected im age. A thumbnail of the image is shown in the main view. Text âÂÂInserts text to the video c lip. You can insert a title, subtitle, or credits. Sound clip âÂÂInserts the selected sound clip. The name and length of the selected sound clip is shown in the main view. New sound clip âÂÂRecords a new sound c lip to the selected location. Movie âÂÂTo preview the movie in full screen or as a thumbnail, save the movie, or cut the movie to a proper size for sending it in a multimedia message. Tip! To take a snapshot of a video clip, select Options > Take snapshot in the thumbnail Preview view or in the Cut video clip view. To cut a video or sound clip, move to the preferred timeline and select Options > Edit video clip > Cut or Options > Edit sound clip > Cut . In the Cut video clip view or Cut sound clip view, to mark the st arting point of the video or sound clip, select Options > Start mk. To mark the end of the video or sound clip, select Options > End mark . To play the cut clip, select Options > Play marked section . To save the changes, press Done . To save your video, in the vi deo editor main view, select Options > Movie > Save . To define the Memory in use , select Options > Settings . The default is the phone memory. Tip! In the Settings view, you can define Default video name , Default sc. shot name , Resolution , and Memory in use .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 54 Select Send > Via multimedia , Via e-mail , or Via Bluetooth if you want to send the video. Contact your service provider for details of the maximum multimedia message size that you can send . If your video is too large to be sent in a multimedia message, the symbol appears. Select Options > Movie > Edit for MMS to cut the movie. Tip! If you want to send a vi deo clip that is over the maximum multimedia messag e size allowed by your service provider, you can send the clip using Bluetooth. See "Send data using a Bluetooth connection" , p. 99 . You can also transfer your videos using Bluetooth into yo ur Bluetooth-enabled personal computer, or by using a memory card reader (enhancement). Gallery To store and organise your imag es, video clips, sound clips, playlists, and streaming links, in the Fold open mode, press , and select Gallery . To open the gallery in the Imaging mode, select Options > Go to Gallery . In the Imaging mode, only the Images & video folder is available. Tip! To switch from Gallery to the camera in the Imaging mode, select Camera. Select Images & video , Tracks , Sound clips , Links , or All files , and press to open it. You can browse and open folders; and mark, copy, and move items to folders. Sound clips, video clips, .ram files, and streaming links are opened and played in the RealPlayer application. See "RealPlayerâ¢" , p. 58 . You can also create albums; and mark, copy, and add items to albums. See "Albums" , p. 56 . Tip! You can transfer images from your device to a compatible PC with Nokia Phone Browser available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Press to open a file. Vide os, music, and sound clips open in RealPlayer . See "View images and video clips" , p. 55 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 55 To copy or move files to th e memory card or to phone memory, select a file and Options > Organise > Copy to memory card / Move to memory card or Copy to phone mem. / Move to phone mem. . Files stored on the memory card are indicated with . To download files into Gallery in one of the main folders using the browser, select th e download icon, for example ( ) to download images. Th e browser opens, and you can select a bookmark from which the site can download. View images and video clips Pictures taken and video clip s recorded with the camera are stored in the Images & video folder in Gallery . The quality of a video clip is indicated with one of the following icons: (High), (Normal), or (Sharing). For more information on video quality, see "Video settings" , p. 50 . Images and video clips can also be sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or through a Bluetooth connection. To be able to view a received image or video clip in the gallery or in the media player, you must save it in the phone memory or on a memory card. Open the Images & video folder in Gallery . The images and video clip files are in a l oop, and ordered by date. The number of files can be seen on the display. To browse the files, scroll up or down. Press and hold the scroll key up or down to browse the files in a continuous loop. To move several files at a time, scroll left or right. Tip! To navigate and open files in the Imaging mode, use the joystick. Options in the Images & video main view are Open (images only), Play (videos only), Send , Go to Camera , Add to Album , Albums , Print (images only), Edit , Delete , Organise , Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . To edit a photo or a video clip, select Options > Edit . An image editor or a video editor opens. To add an image or a video clip to an album in the gallery, select Options > Add to Album . See "Albums" , p. 56 . To create custom video clips, select a video clip, or several clips, in the gallery, and select Options > Edit . See "Edit video clips" , p. 51 . Options when viewing an image are Zoom in , Send , Add to album , Set as wallpaper , Add to contact , Print , Edit , Delete , Rename , View details , Add to 'Go to' , Help , and Exit . To print your images on a prin ter connected to your device, or to store them on your MMC for later printing with a compatible device, select Options > Print . See "Image print" , p. 57 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Camera and Gallery 56 To zoom an image, select Options > Zoom in . The zooming ratio is at the top of the disp lay. The zooming ratio is not stored permanently. To delete an image or a video clip, press . Albums With albums you can convenie ntly manage your images and video clips. To view the albums list, in the Images & video folder, select Options > Albums . The albums are ordered alphabetical ly. To view the content of an album, press the scroll key. To create a new album, select Options > New album . Enter a name for the album, and select OK . To add a picture or a video clip to an album in the gallery, scroll to a picture or video clip, and select Options > Add to album . A list of albums opens. Select the album to which you want to add the picture or video clip, and press the scroll key. To remove a file from an al bum, press . The file is not deleted from the Images & video folder in Gallery .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 57 Imaging Image print You can print images with Image print by selecting the print option in the gallery, camera, image editor, image viewer, or the acti ve standby mode. Use Image print to print your images using a data cable, a Bluetooth connection, or your memory card. You can only print images wh ich are in .jpg format. The pictures taken with the camera are automatically saved in .jpg format. Note: To print to a PictBri dge-compliant printer, select the print option be fore you connect the USB cable. Select the image you want to print and Options > Print . Printer selection When you use Image print for the first time, a list of available printers is displayed after you select the image. Select a printer you want to us e. The printer is set as the default printer. If you have connected a Pict Bridge-compliant USB printer using the CA-53 cable supplie d with your device, the printer is automatically displayed. If the default printer is not available, a list of available printing devices is displayed again. To change the default printer, select Options > Settings > Default printer . Print preview The print preview view opens only when you start printing an image in the gallery or the active standby mode. The images that you sele cted are displayed using predefined layouts. To change the layout, scroll left and right through the available layo uts for the selected printer. If the images do not fit on a single page, scroll up or down to display the additional pages. Options in print preview are Print , Settings, Help, and Exit .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 58 Print settings The available settings options vary, depending on the capabilities of the printing device you selected. To set a default printer, select Options > Default printer . To select the paper size, select Paper size , the size of paper from the list, and OK . Select Cancel to return to the previous view. RealPlayer⢠Press , and select RealPlayer . With RealPlayer, you can play video clips, sound clips, and playlists, or stream media files over the air. You can ac tivate a streaming link when you browse Web pages, or stor e it in the phone memory or memory card. You can use Real Player also in the Imaging mode with limited key functions. See "Take pictures in the Imaging mode" , p. 41 . RealPlayer supports files with ext ensions such as .aac, .awb, .m4a, .mid, .mp3, and .wav. However, RealPlayer does not necessarily support al l file formats or all the variations of file formats. For example, RealPlayer will attempt to open all .mp4 file s, but some .mp4 files may include content that is not compliant with 3GPP standards and, therefore, is not su pported by this device. Tip! You can transfer music file s from your device to your memory card with Nokia Audio Manager available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with your device. Play video or sound clips Warning: Listen to music at a moderate level.Continuous exposure to high volume may damage your hearing. Options in RealPlayer when a clip is selected are Play / Continue , Play in full screen , Continue in full scr. , Stop , Mute / Unmute , Clip details , Send , Settings , Help , and Exit . 1 To play a media file stored in phone memory, or on the memory card, select Options > Open and select: Most recent clips âÂÂTo play one of the last six files played in RealPlayer . Saved clip âÂÂTo play a file saved in Gallery . See "Gallery" , p. 54 . Mem. card sound clips âÂÂTo create a track list and play the files saved in the memory card. See "Create a track list" , p. 59 . 2 Scroll to a file, and press to play the file. Tip! To view a video clip in full screen mode, press . Press again to change back to normal screen mode.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 59 Icons in RealPlayer : âÂÂRepeat; âÂÂRa ndom; â Repeat and random; and âÂÂLoudspeaker muted. Shortcuts during play: ⢠To fast forward video, press and hold . ⢠To rewind through the vide o clip, press and hold . ⢠To mute the sound, press and hold until the indicator is displayed. To tu rn on the sound, press and hold until you see the indicator. Create a track list To create a track list of th e music tracks on your phone memory, or on the memory card: 1 Select Options > New track list . 2 Select the memory from whic h you want to select the music tracks. 3 Enter a name for the track list. 4 To mark the music tracks you want to include in the track list, select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all . 5 Select Options > Select marked items . Tip! To leave the application open and music playing in the background, press twice to return to the standby mode. To return to the application, press , and select RealPlayer . Stream content over the air Many service providers require you to use an Internet access point (IAP) for your default access point. Other service providers allow you to use a WAP access point. The access points may be conf igured when you first start your device. Contact your service provid er for more information. Note: In RealPlayer , you can only open an rtsp:// URL address. However, RealPlayer will recognise an http link to a .ram file. To stream content over the air, select a streaming link saved in Gallery , on a Web page, or received in a text message or multimedia message. Before live content begins streaming, your devi ce connects to the site and starts loading the content. The content is not saved in your device. Receive RealPlayer settings You may receive RealPlayer settings in a special text message from the network ope rator or service provider. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . For more information, contact your network operator or service provider. Change the RealPlayer settings Select Options > Settings and from the following:
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 60 Video âÂÂTo have RealPlayer automatically repeat video clips after they finish playing. Audio âÂÂTo select if you want to re peat playing of track lists and play sound clips on a tr ack list in random order. Connection âÂÂTo select whether to use a proxy server, change the default access poin t, and set the port range used when connecting. Contac t your service provider for the correct settings. Proxy settings : ⢠Use proxy âÂÂTo use a proxy server, select Yes. ⢠Proxy serv. address âÂÂEnter the IP address of the proxy server. ⢠Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the port number of the proxy server. Glossary : Proxy servers are intermediate servers between media servers and their users. Some service providers use them to provid e additional security or speed up access to browser pages that contain sound or video clips. Network settings : ⢠Default access point âÂÂScroll to the access point you want to use to connect to the Internet, and press . ⢠Online time âÂÂSet the time for RealPlayer to disconnect from the network when you have paused a media clip playing through a network link, select User defined , and press . Enter the time, and select OK . ⢠Lowest UDP port âÂÂEnter the lowest port number of the servers port range. The default value is 6970. ⢠Highest UDP port âÂÂEnter the highest port number of the servers port range. Th e default value is 32000. Select Options > Advanced settings to edit the bandwidth values for different networks. Movie Director To create muvees, press , and select Imaging > Movie . muvees are short, edited vi deo clips that may contain video, images, music, and text. Quick muvee is created automatically by Movie director after you select the style for the muvee. Movie director randomly selects images, and uses the default music and text associated with the chosen style. Every style has its own font style, colour, music, and pace. In a Custom muvee you can select your own video and music clips, images and style, and add opening and closing message. You can send muvees with MMS. Open Movie , and press or to move between the and views. You can also return to the main view from the view by selecting Done .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 61 The view contains a list of video clips that you can Play , Send , Rename , and Delete . Create a quick muvee 1 In the Movie director main view, select Quick muvee . 2 Select a style for the muve e from the style list. The created muvee is saved in Movie director muvee list. The muvee is played automatically after saving. Tip! To download new styles to your device, select Style downlds. ( ) from the Movie director main view. Create a custom muvee 1 In the Movie Director main view, select Custom muvee . 2 Select the clips you want to include in your muvee in Video , Image , Style , or Music . After you have selected video clips and images, to define the order in which th e files are played in the muvee, select Options > Advanced options . Select the file you want to move by pr essing the scroll key. Then scroll to the file below wh ich you want to place the marked file, and press the scroll key. To cut the video clips, select Options > Select contents . See "Select content" , p. 61 . In Message you can add an opening and closing text to a muvee. 3 Select Create muvee . and from the following: Multimedia message âÂÂto optimise the length of the muvee for MMS sending. Auto-select âÂÂto include all the selected pictures and video clips in the muvee. Same as music âÂÂto set the muvee duration to be the same as the chosen music clip. User defined âÂÂto define the length of the muvee. 4 Select Options > Save . To preview the custom muvee before saving it, in the Preview muvee view, select Options > Play . To create a new custom muv ee by using the same style settings, select Options > Recreate . Select content After you select images and vi deo clips for your muvee, you can edit the selected video clips. Select Options > Advanced options > Options > Select contents . You can select which parts of the video clip you want to include or exclude in the muvee. A slid er below the video screen indicates the included, exclu ded, and neutralised parts with colours: green is for incl uded, red is for excluded, and grey is for neutral parts.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Imaging 62 To include a part of the video clip in the muvee, scroll to the part, and select Options > Include . To exclude a part from the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Options > Exclude . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude a part of the video clip, scroll to the part, and select Options > Mark as neutral . To exclude a shot from the video clip, select Options > Exclude shot . To let Movie director randomly include or exclude parts of the video clip, select Options > Mark all as neutral . Settings Select Settings to edit the following options: Memory in use âÂÂSelect where to store your muvees. Resolution âÂÂSelect the resolution of your muvees. Default muvee name âÂÂSet a default name for the muvees.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 63 Messaging Press , and select Messaging . In Messaging , you can create, send, receive, view , edit, and organise text messages, multimedia messages, e-mail messages, and special text messages cont aining data. You can also receive messages and data through a Bluetooth connection, receive Web service messages, cell broadcast messages, and send service commands. Note: Only devices that have compatible features can receive and display multimedia messages. The appearance of a message may vary depending on the receiving device. When you open Messaging , you can see the New message function and a list of folders: Inbox âÂÂContains received messa ges except e-mail and cell broadcast messages. E-ma il messages are stored in the Mailbox . My folders âÂÂFor organising your messages into folders. Mailbox âÂÂIn Mailbox you can connect to your remote mailbox to retrieve your new e- mail messages or view your previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. See "E-mail" , p. 76 . Drafts âÂÂStores draft messages that have not been sent. Sent âÂÂStores the last 20 messages that have been sent excluding messages sent using a Bluetooth connection. To change the number of messages to be saved, see "Other settings" , p. 78 . Outbox âÂÂA temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Reports ( )âÂÂYou can request the network to send you a delivery report of the text messages and multimedia messages you have sent. Receiv ing a delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address might not be possible. Tip! When you have opened any of the default folders, you can switch between the folders by pressing or . To enter and send service re quests (also known as USSD commands), such as activa tion commands for network services, to your service provider, select Options > Service command in the main view of Messaging .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 64 Cell broadcast allows you to receive messages on various topics, such as weathe r or traffic conditions from your service provider. For av ailable topics and relevant topic numbers, contact your se rvice provider. In the main view of Messaging , select Options > Cell broadcast . In the main view you can see the status of a topic, a topic number, name, and whether it has been flagged ( ) for follow-up. Options in Cell broadcast are Open , Subscribe / Unsubscribe , Hotmark / Remove hotmark , Topic , Settings , Help , and Exit . Cell broadcast messages cannot be received in UMTS networks. A packet data connection may prevent cell broadcast reception. Write text Traditional text input and indicate the selected case. means that the first letter of the word is written in uppercase, and all other letters are automati cally written in lowercase. indicates number mode. The indicator is shown on the top right of the display when you are writing text us ing traditional text input. ⢠Press a number key ( â ) repe atedly until the desired character appears. There are more characters available for a number key than are printed on the key. ⢠To insert a number, press and hold the number key. ⢠To switch between letter and number mode, press and hold . ⢠If the next letter is located on the same key as the present one, wait until the cursor appears (or press to end the time-out period ), and enter the letter. ⢠To erase a character, press . Press and hold to clear more than one character. ⢠The most common punctuation marks are available under . Press repeatedly to reach the desired punctuation mark. Press to open a list of sp ecial characters. Use to move through the list, and press Select to select a character. ⢠To insert a space, press . To move the cursor to the next line, press three times. ⢠To switch between the different character modes, press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 65 Predictive text inputâÂÂDictionary You can enter any lett e r w i t h a s i n g l e k e y p r e s s . P r e d i c t i v e text input is based on a built -in dictionary to which you can also add new words. When the dictionary becomes full, the latest added word replaces the oldest. 1 To activate predictive text input, press , and select Dictionary on . This activates predictive text input for all editors in the phone. is shown on the top right of the display when you write text using predictive text input. 2 To write the desired word, press the keys â . Press each key only once for one letter. For example, to writ e âÂÂNokiaâ when the English dictionary is selected, press for N, for o, for k, for i, and for a. The word suggestion changes after each key press. 3 When you finish writing the wo rd and it is correct, to confirm it, press , or press to add a space. If the word is not correct, press repeatedly to view the matching words the dict ionary has found one by one, or press , and select Dictionary > Matches . If the ? character is shown after the word, the word you intended to write is not in the dictionary. To add a word to the dictionary, select Spell , enter the word using traditional text input, and select OK . The word is added to the dictionary. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. 4 Start writing the next word. Tip! To set predictive text input on or off, press twice quickly. Tips on predictive text input To erase a character, press . Press and hold to clear more than one character. To change between the differ ent character modes, press . If you press quickly twice, pr edictive text input is turned off. Tip! Predictive text inpu t tries to guess which commonly used punctuation mark ( .,?!â ) is needed. The order and availability of the punctuation marks depend on the language of the dictionary. To insert a number in lett er mode, press and hold the desired number key. To switch between letter an d number mode, press and hold .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 66 The most common punctuation marks are available under . Press and then repeatedly to search for the desired punctuation mark. Press and hold to open a list of special characters. Press repeatedly to view the matching words the dictionary has found one by one. Press , select Dictionary , and press to select one of the following options: Matches âÂÂTo view a list of words that correspond to your key presses. Insert word âÂÂTo add a word to the dictionary by using traditional text input. When the dictionary becomes full, a new word replaces the oldest added word. Edit word âÂÂTo edit the word using traditional text input. This is available if the wo rd is active (underlined). Tip! When you press , th e following options appear (depending on the editing mode): Dictionary (predictive text input), Alpha mode (traditional text input), Number mode , Cut (if text has been selected), Copy (if text has been selected), Paste (when text has been cut or copied first), Insert number , Insert symbol , and Writing language: (changes the input language for all editors in the phone). Write compound words Write the first half of a co mpound word; to confirm it, press . Write the last part of the compound word. To complete the compound word, press to add a space. Turn predictive text input off Press , and select Dictionary > Off to turn predictive text input off for all editors in the phone. Copy text to clipboard 1 To select letters and word s, press and hold . At the same time, press or . As the selection moves, text is highlighted. 2 To copy the text to the cl ipboard, while still holding , select Copy . 3 To insert the text into a document, press and hold , and select Paste , or press once, and select Paste . To select lines of text, pr ess and hold . At the same time press or . To remove the selected text from the document, press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 67 Write and send messages The appearance of a multimedia message may vary, depending on the receiving device. Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Tip! You can start to crea te a message from any application that has the option Send . Select a file (image or text) to be a dded to the message, and select Options > Send . Before you can create a mult imedia message or write an e-mail, you must have the correct connection settings in place. See "Receive MMS and e-mail settings" , p. 68 and "E-mail" , p. 76 . The wireless network may limit the size of MMS messages. If the inserted picture exceed s this limit, the device may make it smaller so that it can be sent by MMS. 1 Select New message . A list of message options opens. Text message âÂÂto send a text message. Multimedia message âÂÂto send a multimedia message (MMS). E-mail âÂÂto send an e-mail. If yo u have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. 2 Press to select recipients or groups from contacts, or enter the recipientâÂÂs phone number or e-mail address. Press to add a semicolon ( ; ) that separates the recipients. You can also copy and paste the number or address from the clipboard. Tip! Scroll to a contact, and press to mark it. You can mark several recipients at a time. 3 Press to move to the message field. 4 Write the message. 5 To add a media object to a multimedia message, select Options > Insert object > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . When sound is added, the icon is shown in the navigation bar. You cannot send video clips th at are saved in the .mp4 format in a multimedia messa ge. To change the format in which recorded videos are saved, see "Video settings" , p. 50 . 6 To take a new picture or record sound or video for a multimedia message, select Insert new > Image , Sound clip , or Video clip . To insert a new slide to the message, select Slide .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 68 Select Options > Preview to see what the multimedia message looks like. 7 To add an attachment to an e-mail, select Options > Insert > Image , Sound clip , Video clip or Note . E-mail attachments are indicated by in the navigation bar. Tip! To send files other than sounds and notes as attachments, open the appropriate application, and select Send > Via e-mail , if available. 8 To send the message, select Options > Send , or press . Your device supports the sending of text messages beyond the character limit for a single message. Longer messages will be sent as a series of two or more messages. Your service provider may charge a ccordingly. Characters that use accents or other marks, and characters from some language options like Chinese, take up more space limiting the number of characters that can be sent in a single message. In the navigation ba r, you can see the message length indicator counting backwards. For example, 10 (2) means that you can still add 10 characters for the text to be sent as two messages. Note: E-mail messages are automatically placed in Outbox before sending. If sending does not succeed, the e-mail is left in the Outbox with the Failed status. Tip! In Messaging you can also create presentations and send them in a multimedia message. In the multimedia message editor view, select Options > Create presentation (shown only if MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ). See "Multimedia messages" , p. 75 . Tip! When you send a mult imedia message to an e-mail address or a devi ce that supports the receiving of large images, use the larger image size. If you are not sure of the receiving device, or the network does not support se nding large files, it is recommended that you use a smaller image size or a sound clip that is no long er than 15 seconds. To change the setting, select Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Image size in the Messaging main view. Receive MMS and e-mail settings You may receive the settings in a text message from your network operator or service provider. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . For availability of and subs cription to data services, contact your network operator or service provider. Follow the instructions given by your service provider.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 69 Enter the MMS settings manually: 1 Select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points , and define the settings fo r a multimedia messaging access point. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 . 2 Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Access point in use and the access point you created to be used as the preferred connection. See also "Multimedia messages" , p. 75 . Before you can send, receive, retrieve, reply to, and forward e-mail, you must do the following: ⢠Configure an Internet access point (IAP) correctly. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 . ⢠Define your e-mail sett ings correctly. See "E-mail" , p. 76 . You need to have a separate e-mail account. Follow the instructions give n by your remote mailbox and Internet servic e provider (ISP). InboxâÂÂreceive messages Inbox icons: âÂÂunread messages in Inbox ; âÂÂunread text message; âÂÂunread multimedia message; âÂÂdata received through a Bluetooth connection. When you receive a mess age, and the text 1 new message are shown in the standby mode. Select Show to open the message. To open a message in Inbox , scroll to it, and press . Multimedia messages Important: Excercise caution when opening messages. Multimedia message objects may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. You may receive a notification that you have received a multimedia message that is saved in the multimedia message centre. To start a packet data connection to retrieve the message to your phone, select Options > Retrieve . When you open a multimedia message ( ), you may see an image and a message, and simultaneously listen to a sound through the loudspeaker ( is shown if sound is included). Click the arrow in th e icon to listen to the sound. To see what kinds of media ob jects have been included in the multimedia message, open the message, and select Options > Objects . You can choose to save a multimedia object file in your phone or send it, for example, through a Bluetooth connection to another compatible device. To view received multimedia presentations, select Options > Play presentation .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 70 Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Data and settings Your phone can receive many kinds of text messages that contain data ( ), also called over-the-air (OTA) messages: Configuration message âÂÂYou may receive a text message service number, voice mailbox number, Internet access point settings, access point login script settings, or e-mail settings from your network op erator, service provider, or company information management department in a configuration message. To save the settings, select Options > Save all . Business card âÂÂTo save the information to Contacts , select Options > Save business card . Certificates or sound files attached to the business card are not saved. Ringing tone âÂÂTo save the ringing tone, select Options > Save . Operator logo âÂÂFor the logo to be shown in the standby mode instead of the network operatorâÂÂs own identification, select Options > Save . Calendar entry âÂÂTo save the invitation, select Options > Save to Calendar . Web message âÂÂTo save the bookmark to the bookmarks list in Web, select Options > Add to bookmarks . If the message contains both a ccess point settings and bookmarks, to save the data, select Options > Save all . E-mail notification âÂÂTells you how many new e-mails you have in your remote mailbox . An extended notification may list more detailed information. Tip! If you receive a vCard file that has a picture attached, the picture is saved to contacts. Web service messages Web service messages ( ) are notifications (for example, news headlines) and may contai n a text message or a link. For availability and subscrip tion, contact your service provider. My folders In My folders , you can organise your messages into folders, create new folders, and rename and delete folders. Tip! You can use texts in the templates folder to avoid rewriting messages that you send often.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 71 Mailbox If you select Mailbox and have not set up your e-mail account, you are prompted to do so. See "E-mail" , p. 76 . When you create a new mailbox, the name you give to the mailbox replaces Mailbox in the Messaging main view. You can have up to six mailboxes. Open the mailbox When you open the mailbox, you can choose whether you want to view the previously retrieved e-mail messages and e-mail headings offline or co nnect to the e-mail server. When you scroll to your mailbox, and press , the phone asks you if you want to Connect to mailbox? . Select Yes to connect to your ma ilbox, and retrieve new e-mail headings or messages. When you view messages online, you are continuously connected to a remote mailbox using a packet data connection. See also "Connection settings" , p. 108 . Select No to view previously retrieved e-mail messages offline. When you view e-ma il messages offline, your phone is not connected to the remote mailbox. Retrieve e-mail messages If you are offline, select Options > Connect to start a connection to a remote mailbox. Important: Exercise caution when opening messages. E-mail messages may contain malicious software or otherwise be harmful to your device or PC. 1 When you have an open connection to a remote mailbox, select Options > Retrieve e-mail . New âÂÂto retrieve all new e-mail messages to your phone. Selected âÂÂto retrieve only the e-mail messages that have been marked. All âÂÂto retrieve all messages from the mailbox. To stop retrieving messages, select Cancel . 2 After you have retrieved th e e-mail messages, you can continue viewing them online, or select Options > Disconnect to close the connection and view the e-mail messages offline.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 72 E-mail status icons: New e-mail (offline or online mode): the content has not been retrieved to your phone. New e-mail: the content has been retrieved to your phone. The e-mail message has been read. The e-mail heading has be en read and the message content has been de leted from the phone. 3 To open an e-mail message, press . If the e-mail message has not been retrie ved (arrow in the icon is pointing outwards) and you are offline, you are asked if you want to retrieve this message from the mailbox. To view e-mail attachments, open a message that has the attachment indicator , and select Options > Attachments . If the attachment has a dimmed indicator, it has not been retrieve d to the phone; select Options > Retrieve . In the Attachments view, you can retrieve, open, save, or remove attachments. You can also send attachments using a Bluetooth connection. Tip! If your mailbox uses the IMAP4 protocol, you can define how many mess ages to retrieve, and whether to retrieve the attachments. With the POP3 protocol, the options are Headers only , Partially (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. . Retrieve e-mail messages automatically To retrieve messages automatically, select Options > E-mail settings > Automatic retrieval > Header retrieval . Select Always on , or Only in home net. , and define when, and how often, the messages are retrieved. Retrieving e-mail messages automatically may increase your call costs due to the data traffic. Delete e-mail messages To delete the contents of an e-mail message from the phone while still retaining it in the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone only . The phone mirrors the e-mail headings in the remote mailbox. Although you delete the message content, the e-mail heading stays in your phone. If you want to remove the heading as well, you must first delete the e-mail message from your remote mailbox, and then make a connection from your phone to the remote mailbox again to update the status. Tip! T o c o p y a n e - m a i l f r o m t h e r e m o t e m a i l b o x t o a folder under My folders , select Options > Copy to folder , a folder from the list, and OK .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 73 To delete an e-mail from the phone and the remote mailbox, select Options > Delete . In Delete msg. from: , select Phone and server . If you are offline, the e-mail is deleted first from your phone. During the next connec tion to the remote mailbox, it is automatically deleted fr om the remote mailbox. If you are using the POP3 protocol, messages marked to be deleted are removed only af ter you have closed the connection to the remote mailbox. To cancel deleting an e-ma il from the phone and server, scroll to an e-mail that has been marked to be deleted during the next connec tion ( ), and select Options > Undelete . Disconnect from the mailbox When you are online, select Options > Disconnect to end the packet data connection to the remote mailbox. Tip! You can also leave your mailbox connection open and the new e-mails ( Headers only as default) will be retrieved from the remote mailbox to your phone automatically (only if the IMAP IDLE function is supported by your server ). To leave the messaging application open in the ba ckground, press twice. Leaving the connection open may increase your call costs due to the data traffic. View e-mail messages when offline When you open Mailbox the next time and you want to view and read the e-mail messages offline, answer No to the Connect to mailbox? query. You can read the previously retrieved e-mail he adings, the retrieved e-mail messages, or both. You can also write new, reply to, or forward e-mail to be sent the next time you connect to the mailbox. OutboxâÂÂmessages waiting to be sent Outbox is a temporary storage place for messages waiting to be sent. Status of the messages in Outbox are: Sending âÂÂA connection is being made and the message is being sent. Waiting / Queued âÂÂThe message will be sent when previous messages of a similar type have been sent. Resend at (time)âÂÂThe phone will try to send the message again after a time-out period. Select Send to restart the sending immediately. Deferred â Y o u c a n s e t d o c u m e n t s t o b e o n h o l d w h i l e t h e y are in Outbox . Scroll to a message th at is being sent, and select Options > Defer sending .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 74 Failed âÂÂThe maximum number of sending attempts has been reached. Sending has fail ed. If you were trying to send a text message, open the message, and check that the Sending options are correct. Example: Messages are placed in the outbox, for example, when your phone is outside network coverage. You can also schedule e-mail messages to be sent the next time yo u connect to your remote mailbox. View messages on a SIM card Before you can view SIM messages, you need to copy them to a folder in your phone. 1 In the Messaging main view, select Options > SIM messages . 2 Select Options > Mark/Unmark > Mark or Mark all to mark messages. 3 Select Options > Copy . A list of folders opens. 4 Select a folder and OK to start copying. Open the folder to view the messages. Messaging settings Text messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Text message . Message centres âÂÂLists all the text message centres that have been defined. Msg. centre in use âÂÂSelect which message centre is used for delivering text messages. Receive report ( )âÂÂTo request the network to send delivery reports on your messages. When set to No , only the Sent status is shown in the log. See "Log" , p. 35 . Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, the message is removed from the text message centre . The network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allowed by the network. Message sent as âÂÂChange this option only if you are sure that your message centre is ab le to convert text messages into these other formats. Co ntact your network operator. Preferred connection âÂÂYou can send text messages through the normal GSM network or through packet data, if supported by the network. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 75 Reply via same ctr. ( )âÂÂChoose Yes , if you want the reply message to be sent us ing the same text message centre number. Add a new text message centre 1 Select Message centres > Options > New msg. centre . 2 Press , write a name for the message centre, and select OK . 3 Press and , and write the number of the text message centre. You receive the number from your service provider. 4 Select OK . 5 To use the new settings, go back to the settings view. Scroll to Msg. centre in use , and select the new message centre. Multimedia messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Image size âÂÂDefine the size of the image in a multimedia message. The options are Original (shown only when the MMS creation mode is set to Guided or Free ), Small , and Large . Select Original to increase the size of the multimedia message. MMS creation mode âÂÂIf you select Guided , the phone informs you if you try to send a message that may not be supported by the recipient. If you select Restricted ; the phone prevents you from se nding messages that are not supported. Access point in use ( Must be defined )âÂÂSelect which access point is used as the preferred connection for the multimedia message centre. Multimedia retrieval âÂÂSelect how you want to receive multimedia messages. To receive multimedia messages automatically in your home network, select Aut. in home network . Outside your home network, you receive a notification that you have re ceived a multimedia message that is saved in the multimedia message centre. You can select if you want to retrie ve the message to your phone. When you are outside your home network, sending and receiving multimedia messages may cost you more. If you select Multimedia retrieval > Always automatic , your phone automatically make s an active packet data connection to retrieve the message both in and outside your home network. Allow anon. messages âÂÂSelect No if you want to reject messages from an anonymous sender. Receive adverts âÂÂDefine whether you want to receive multimedia message advertisements. Receive report ( )âÂÂSelect Yes if you want the status of the sent message to be show n in the log. Receiving a
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 76 delivery report of a multimedia message that has been sent to an e-mail address might not be possible. Deny report sending âÂÂSelect Yes if you do not want your phone to send delivery report s of received multimedia messages. Message validity âÂÂIf the recipient of a message cannot be reached within the validity pe riod, the message is removed from the multimedia messaging centre. The network must support this feature. Maximum time is the maximum amount of time allo wed by the network. Tip! You may also obtain the multimedia and e-mail settings from your service provider through a configuration message. Contact your service provider for more information. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . E-mail Select Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail , or in the mailbox main view, select Options > E-mail settings , and select from the following: Mailbox in use âÂÂSelect which mailbox you want to use for sending e-mail. Mailboxes âÂÂOpens a list of mailboxes that have been defined. If no mailboxes ha ve been defined, you are prompted to do so. Select a mailbox to change the following settings: Mailbox settings , User settings , and Automatic retrieval . Mailbox settings : Mailbox name âÂÂEnter a descriptive name for the mailbox. Access point in use ( Must be defined )âÂÂChoose an Internet access point (IAP) for the mailbox. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 . My e-mail address ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the e-mail address given to you by your service provider. Replies to your messages are sent to this address. Outgoing mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the mail server that sends your e-mail. You may only be able to use the outgoing server of your network operator. Contac t your service provider for more information. User name âÂÂEnter your user name, given to you by your service provider. Password: âÂÂEnter your password. If you leave this field blank, you are prompted for the password when you try to connect to your remote mailbox. Incoming mail server ( Must be defined )âÂÂEnter the IP address or host name of the ma il server that receives your e-mail.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 77 Mailbox type: âÂÂDefines the e-mail protocol that your remote mailbox service provid er recommends. The options are POP3 and IMAP4 . This setting can be selected only once and cannot be changed if you have saved or exited from the mailbox settings. If you are using the POP3 protocol, e-mail messages are not updated automatically in online mode. To see the la test e-mail messages, you must disconnect and make a new connection to your mailbox. Security (ports) âÂÂUsed with the POP3, IMAP4, and SMTP protocols to secure the connection to the remote mailbox. APOP secure login (not shown if IMAP 4 is selected for Mailbox type )âÂÂUsed with the POP3 protocol to encrypt the sending of passwords to the remote e-mail server while connecting to the mailbox. User settings : Send message âÂÂDefine how e-mail is sent from your phone. Select Immediately for the device to connect to the mailbox when you select Send message . If you select When conn. avail. , e-mail is sent when the connection to the remote mailbox is available. E-mails to retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂDefine how many new e-mails are retrieved to the mailbox. Retrieve (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to IMAP4)âÂÂDefine which parts of the e-mails are retrieved: Headers only , Partially (kB) , or Msgs. & attachs. Retrieve attachments (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂChoose whether you want to retrieve e-mail with or without attachments. Subscribed folders (not shown if the e-mail protocol is set to POP3)âÂÂYou can subscribe to other folders in the remote mailbox and retrieve content from those folders. Send copy to self âÂÂSelect Yes to save a copy of the e-mail to your remote mailbox and to the address defined in My e-mail address . Include signature âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to attach a signature to your e-mail messages. My name âÂÂEnter your own name here. Your name replaces your e-mail address in the recipientâÂÂs phone when the recipientâÂÂs phone supports this function. Automatic retrieval : Header retrieval âÂÂWhen this function is on, messages are retrieved automatically. Yo u can define when, and how often, the messages are retrieved. Activating Header retrieval may increase your call costs due to the data traffic.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Messaging 78 Web service messages Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Service message . Choose whether you want to receive service messages. If you want to set the phone to automatically activate the browser and star t a network connection to retrieve content when the phone receives a service message, select Download messages > Automatically . Cell broadcast Check the available topics an d related topic numbers with your service provider, and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Cell broadcast to change the settings. Reception âÂÂChoose whether you want to receive cell broadcast messages. Language â All allows you to receive cell broadcast messages in all supported languages. Selected allows you to choose in which language s you wish to receive cell broadcast messages. If you cannot find the desired language, select Other . Topic detection âÂÂIf you have set Topic detection > On , the phone automatically search es for new topic numbers, and saves the new numbers wi thout a name to the topic list. Select Off if you do not want to save new topic numbers automatically. Other settings Select Messaging > Options > Settings > Other . Save sent messages âÂÂChoose if you want to save a copy of every text message, multimedia message, or e-mail that you have sent to the Sent folder. No. of saved msgs. âÂÂDefine how many sent messages are saved to the Sent folder at a time. The default limit is 20 messages. When the limit is re ached, the oldest message is deleted. Memory in use âÂÂChoose the memory where you want to save your messages: Phone memory or Memory card . Tip! If Memory card is selected, activate the offline profile before opening the memory card slot door or removing the memory card. When the memory card is not available, messages are saved in the phone memory. New e-mail alerts âÂÂChoose whether you want to receive the new e-mail indications, a tone or a note, when new mail is received to the mailbox.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar 79 Calendar Shortcut: Press any key ( â ) in any calendar view. A meeting entry opens, and the characters you enter are added to the Subject field. Tip! Regularly back up the phone information to the memory card. You can restor e the information, such as calendar entries, to the phone later. See "Memory card tool" , p. 18 . Create calendar entries 1 Press , and select Calendar > Options > New entry and from the following: Meeting âÂÂTo remind you of an appointment that has a specific date and time. Memo âÂÂTo write a general entry for a day. Anniversary âÂÂTo remind you of birthdays or special dates. Anniversary entries are repeated every year. 2 Fill in the fields. Use to move between fields. Alarm (meetings and anniversaries)âÂÂSelect On , and press to fill in the Alarm time and Alarm date fields. in the day view indicates an alarm. Repeat âÂÂPress to change the entry to be repeating ( is shown in the day view). Repeat until âÂÂYou can set an end date for the repeated entry. Synchronisation : Private âÂÂafter synchronisation the calendar entry can be seen only by you and it will not be shown to others with online access to view the calendar. Public âÂÂThe calendar entry is shown to others who have access to view your calendar online. None âÂÂThe calendar entry will not be copied to your PC when you synchronise. 3 To save the entry, select Done . To stop a calendar alarm, select Silence to turn off the calendar alarm tone. The remind er text stays on the screen. Select Stop to end the calendar alarm. Select Snooze to set the alarm to snooze.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar 80 Tip! To send a calendar note to a compatible phone, select Options > Send > Via text message , Via multimedia , or Via Bluetooth . Tip! You can move calendar and to-do data from many different Nokia phones to your phone or synchronise your calendar and to-do to a compatible PC using Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. Set a calendar alarm You can set an alarm to re mind you of meetings and anniversaries. 1 Open an entry in which you want to set an alarm, and select Alarm > On . 2 Set the Alarm time and Alarm date . 3 Scroll down to Repeat , and press to select how often you want the alarm to be repeated. 4 Select Done . To delete a calendar alarm, open the entry in which you want to delete an alarm, and select Alarm > Off . Calendar views Tip! Select Options > Settings to change the starting day of the week or the view that is shown when you open the calendar. In the month view, dates that have calendar entries are marked with a small triangle at the right bottom corner. In the week view, memos and anni versaries are placed before 8 oâÂÂclock. Press to switch between the month view, the week view, and the day view. Icons in the day and week views: Memo Anniversary There is no icon for Meeting . To go to a certain date, select Options > Go to date , write the date, and select OK . Press to jump to today. Remove calendar entries Removing past entries in Calendar saves space in your phone memory. To remove more than one even t at a time, go to the month view, and select Options > Delete entry and one of the following:
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Calendar 81 Before date âÂÂDeletes all calendar en tries that take place before a certain date you define. All entries âÂÂDeletes all calendar entries. Calendar settings To modify the Calendar alarm tone , Default view , Week starts on , and Week view title , select Options > Settings .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 82 Web Various service providers maintain pages specifically designed for mobile devices. To access these pages, press , and select Web . These pages use the wireless markup language (WML), extensible hypertext markup language (XHTML), or hypertext ma rkup language (HTML). Check the availability of servic es, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator or service provider. Service providers will also give you in structions on how to use their services. Shortcut: To start a connection, press and hold in the standby mode. Access the Web ⢠Save the settings that are needed to access the Web page that you want to use. See the sections "Receive browser settings" , p. 82 or "Enter the settings manually" , p. 82 . ⢠Make a connection to the Web. See "Make a connection" , p. 83 . ⢠Start browsing the pages. See "Browse" , p. 84 . ⢠End the connection to the Web. See "End a connection" , p. 86 . Receive browser settings Tip! Settings may be availabl e on the Web site of a network operator or service provider. You may receive Web service settings in a special text message from the network ope rator or service provider that offers the Web page. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . For more information, contac t your network operator or service provider. Enter the settings manually Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. 1 Press and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points , and define the settings for an access point. See "Connection settings", p. 108 . 2 Select Web > Options > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . Write a name for the bookmark and the address of the page defined for the current access point. 3 To set the created access point as the default access point in Web , select Web > Options > Settings > Access point .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 83 Bookmarks view Glossary: A bookmark consists of an Internet address (mandatory), bookmark title, access point, and if the Web page requires, a user name and password. Options in the bookmarks view are Open / Download , Bookmark manager , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Tools , Advanced options , Send , Find bookmark , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . Your device may have some b ookmarks loaded for sites not affiliated with Nokia. Nokia does not warrant or endorse these sites. If you choose to access them, you should take the same precautions, for securi ty or content, as you would with any Internet site. Icons in the bookmark view: The starting page defined for the default access point. If you use another defaul t access point for browsing, the starting page is changed accordingly. The automatic bookmarks fo lder contains bookmarks ( ) that are collected auto matically when you browse pages. The bookmarks in this folder are automatically organised according to domain. Any bookmark showing the ti tle or Internet address of the bookmark. Add bookmarks manually 1 In the bookmarks view, select Options > Bookmark manager > Add bookmark . 2 Start to fill in the fields. On ly the URL address must be defined. The default access point is assigned to the bookmark if no other one is selected. Press to enter special characters such as / , . , : , and @ . Press to clear characters. 3 Select Options > Save to save the bookmark. Send bookmarks Scroll to a bookmark, and select Options > Send > Via text message . Press to send. It is po ssible to send more than one bookmark at the same time. Make a connection Once you have stored all the required connection settings, you can access the pages. 1 Select a bookmark or enter th e address in the field ( ). When you enter the address, matching bookmarks are shown above the field. Pre ss to select a matching bookmark. 2 Press to start to download the page.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 84 Connection security If the security indicator is displayed during a connection, the data transmission between the device and the Internet gateway or server is encrypted. The security icon does no t indicate that the data transmission between the gateway and the content server (or place where the requested re source is stored) is secure. The service provider secure s the data transmission between the gateway and the content server. Select Options > Details > Security to view details about the connection, encryptions st atus, and information about server and user authentication. Security features may be requ ired for some services, such as banking services. For su ch connections you need security certificates. For more information, contact your service provider. See also "Certificate management" , p. 112 . Browse I mportant: Use only services that you trust and that offer adequate securi ty and protection against harmful software. Options when browsing (d epending on the page you are viewing) are Open , Accept , Remove file , Open in viewer , Service options , Bookmarks , Save as bookmark , Navigation options , Tools , Advanced options , Show images , Send bookmark , Find , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . On a browser page, new links appear underlined in blue and previously visited links in purple. Images that act as links have a blue border around them. To open a link, to check boxes, and make selections, press . Shortcut: Use to jump to the end of a page and to the beginning of a page. To go to the previous pa ge while browsing, select Back . If Back is not available, select Options > Navigation options > History to view a chronological list of the pages you have visited during a browsing session. The history list is cleared each time a session is closed. To retrieve the latest cont ent from the server, select Options > Navigation options > Reload . To save a bookmark, select Options > Save as bookmark . Tip! To access the bookmarks view while browsing, press and hold down . To return to the browser view again, select Options > Back to page .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 85 To save a page while browsing, select Options > Advanced options > Save page . You can save pages either to the phone memory or on a memo ry card, and browse them when offline. To access the pages later, press in the bookmarks view to open the Saved pages view. To enter a new URL address, select Options > Navigation options > Go to web address . To open a sublist of commands or actions for the currently open page, select Options > Service options . You can download files that cannot be shown on the browser page, such as ring ing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and video clips. Downloaded items are handled by the respective app lications in your phone, for example, a downloaded image is saved in Gallery . Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Tip! Your browser collects bookmarks automatically while you are browsing We b pages. The bookmarks are stored to the automatic bookmarks folder ( ) and automatically organised according to domain. See also "Web settings" , p. 86 . View saved pages If you regularly browse pages containing information that does not change very often, you can save and browse them when offline. In the saved pa ges view you can also create folders to store your saved browser pages. Options in the saved pages view are Open , Back to page , Reload , Saved pages , Mark/Unmark , Navigation options , Advanced options , Details , Settings , Help , and Exit . To open the saved pages view , press in the bookmarks view. In the saved pages vi ew, press to open a saved page ( ). To save a page while browsing, select Options > Advanced options > Save page . To start a connection to the browser service and to download the latest version of the page, select Options > Reload . The phone stays online after you reload the page. Download and purchase items You can download items such as ringing tones, images, operator logos, themes, and vide o clips. These items can be provided free, or you can purchase them. Downloaded items are handled by the respec tive applications in your
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 86 phone, for example, a downlo aded photo can be saved in Gallery . Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. 1 To download the item, scroll to the link, and press . 2 Select the appropriate option to purchase the item, for example, âÂÂBuyâÂÂ. 3 Carefully read all the information provided. To continue the download, select Accept. To cancel the download, select Cancel . Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. End a connection Select Options > Advanced options > Disconnect to end the connection and view the browser page offline, or Options > Exit to end the connection and close the browser. Empty the cache The information or services you have accessed are stored in the cache memory of the phone. A cache is a memory location that is used to store data temporarily. If you have tried to access or have accessed confidential information requ iring passwords, empty the cache after each use. The info rmation or services you have accessed is stored in the cache. To empty the cache, select Options > Advanced options > Clear cache . Web settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Access point âÂÂTo change the default access point, press to open a list of av ailable access points. See "Connection settings" , p. 108 . Show images âÂÂTo select if you want to load images while browsing or not. If you select No , to load images later during browsing, select Options > Show images. Font size âÂÂTo choose the text size. Default encoding âÂÂIf text characte rs are not shown correctly, you may choose another encoding according to language. Automatic bookmarks âÂÂTo disable automatic bookmark collecting, select Off . If you want to continue collecting automatic bookmarks but hi de the folder from the bookmarks view, select Hide folder .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Web 87 Screen size âÂÂTo select what is shown when you are browsing. Select Select. keys only or Full screen . Homepage âÂÂTo define the home page. Search page âÂÂTo define a Web page that is downloaded when you select Navigation options > Open search page in the bookmarks view, or when browsing. Volume âÂÂIf you want the browser to play sounds embedded on Web pages, select a volume level. Rendering âÂÂIf you want the page layout shown as accurately as po ssible when in Small screen mode, select By quality . If you do not want external cascading style sheets to be downloaded, select By speed . Cookies âÂÂTo enable or disable the receiving and sending of cookies. Glossary: Cookies are a means of content providers to identify users and thei r preferences for frequently used content. Java/ECMA script âÂÂTo enable or disable the use of scripts. Security warnings âÂÂTo hide or show security notifications. Serial no. sending âÂÂTo enable or disable serial number sending. Some service providers may require that you enable this function before Web browsing is possible. Conf. DTMF sending âÂÂChoose whether you want to confirm before the phone send s DTMF tones during a voice call. See also "Options during a voice call" , p. 34 .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office 88 Office Calculator To add, substract, multiply, divide, calculate square roots and percentages, press , and select Office > Calculator . Note: This calculator has limited accuracy and is designed for simple calculations. To save a number in th e memory (indicated by M ), select Options > Memory > Save . To retrieve a number in memory, select Options > Memory > Recall . To clear a number in memory, select Options > Memory > Clear . Calculate percentages 1 Enter a number for which you want to calculate a percentage. 2 Select , , , or . 3 Enter the percentage. 4 Select . Converter To convert measures such as Length from one unit ( Yards ) to another ( Metres ), press , and select Office > Converter . Options in Converter are Select unit / Change currency , Conversion type , Currency rates , Help , and Exit . Note that Converter has limited accuracy, and rounding errors may occur. 1 Scroll to the Type field, and press to open a list of measures. Scroll to the meas ure you want to use, and select OK . 2 Scroll to the first Unit field, and press . Select the unit from which you want to convert and OK . Scroll to the next Unit field, and select th e unit to which you want to convert. 3 Scroll to the first Amount field, and enter the value you want to convert. The other Amount field changes automatically to show the converted value.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office 89 Press to add a decimal and for the , - (for temperature), and E (exponent) symbols. Tip! To change the conver sion order, enter the value in the second Amount field. The result is shown in the first Amount field. Set base currency and exchange rates Before you can make currency conversions, you need to choose a base currency and ad d exchange rates. The rate of the base currency is alwa ys 1. The base currency determines the conversion ra tes of the other currencies. 1 Select Converter > Options > Currency rates . A list of currencies opens, and you can see the current base currency at the top. Tip! To rename a currency, go to the currency rates view, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Rename currency . 2 To change the base currency, scroll to the currency, and select Options > Set as base curr. . 3 Add exchange rates. Scroll to the currency, and enter a new rate, that is, how many units of the currency equal one unit of the base cu rrency you have selected. After you have inserted all th e necessary exchange rates, you can make currency conversions. Note: When you change base currency, you must enter the new rates beca use all previously set exchange rates are set to zero. To-do Create a task list Press , and select Office > To-do to write notes and maintain a task list. To add a note, press any key to start to write the task in the Subject field. To set the due date for the task, scroll to the Due date field, and enter a date. To set the priority for the To-do note, scroll to the Priority field, and press to select the priority. The priority icons are ( High ) and ( Low ). There is no icon for Normal . To mark a task as comple ted, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as done . To restore a task, scroll to it in the To-do list, and select Options > Mark as not done .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Office 90 Notes Press , and select Office > Notes to write notes. You can send notes to other compatible devices and save plain text files (.txt format) that you receive to Notes . Recorder Press , and select Office > Recorder to record telephone conversations and voice memos. If you are recording a telephone conversation, both parties hear a tone every 5 seconds during recording.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 91 My own Go toâÂÂadd shortcuts Default shortcuts: Opens Calendar Opens Inbox Opens Notes To store shortcuts (links to your favourite images, notes, bookmarks, and so on), press , and select My own > Go to . Shortcuts are added only from the individual applications, for example, Gallery . Not all applications have this function. 1 Select an item from an a pplication to which you want to add a shortcut. 2 Select Add to 'Go to' . A shortcut in Go to is automatically updated if you move the item to which it is pointing (for example, fro m one folder to another). To change the identifier in the lower left corner of the shortcut icon, select Options > Shortcut icon . Delete a shortcut Select the shortcut, and pr ess . The default shortcuts Notes , Calendar , and Inbox cannot be deleted. When you remove an application or a document which has a shortcut in Go to , the shortcut icon of the removed item is dimmed in the Go to view. The shortcut can be deleted next time you start Go to . IMâÂÂInstant messaging (chat) Press , and select My own > IM . Instant messaging allows yo u to converse with other people using instant messages and join discussion forums (IM groups) with specific topi cs. Various service providers maintain IM servers that you can log in to once you have registered to an IM service. Options in the IM main view are Open , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Select Conversations to start or continue a conversation with an IM user; IM contacts to create, edit, or view the online status of your IM contacts; IM groups to start or continue a group conversation with multiple IM users; or Recorded chats to view a previous instant messaging session that you have saved.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 92 Note: Check the availability of chat services, pricing, and tariffs with your network operator and/ or service provider. Service providers will also give you instructions on how to use their services. Receive IM settings You must save the settings to access the service that you want to use. You may receive the settings in a special text message from the network oper ator or service provider that offers the IM service. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . You can also enter the settings manually. See "Chat server settings" , p. 96 . Connect to an IM server Tip: To log in automatically when you start IM , select Options > Settings > Server settings > IM login type > On app. start-up . 1 Open IM to have your phone connect to the IM server i n u s e . T o c h a n g e t h e I M s e r v e r i n u s e a n d s a v e n e w I M servers, see "Chat server settings" ,p . 96 . 2 Enter your user ID and pa ssword, and press to log in. You obtain the user ID and password for the IM server from your service provider. You can select Cancel to stay offline; to log in to the IM server later, select Options > Login . You cannot send or receive messages while you are offline. 3 To log out, select Options > Logout . Modify your IM settings Select Options > Settings > IM settings : Use screen name (shown only if IM groups are supported by the server)âÂÂTo enter a nickname, select Yes . IM presence âÂÂTo allow others to see if you are online, select Active for all . Allow messages from âÂÂTo allow messages from all, select All . Allow invitations from âÂÂTo allow invitations only from your IM contacts, select IM contacts only . IM invitations a r e s e n t b y I M c on t a c t s w h o wa nt you to join their groups. Msg. scrolling speed âÂÂTo select the speed at which new messages are displayed. Sort IM contacts âÂÂTo sort your IM contacts Alphabetically or By online status . Availability reloading âÂÂTo choose how to update information about whether your IM contacts are online or offline, select Automatic or Manual .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 93 Search for IM groups and users To search for groups, in the IM groups view, select Options > Search . You can search by Group name , Topic, and Members (user ID). To search for users, in the IM contacts view, select Options > New IM contact > Search from server . You can search by User's name , User ID, Phone number , and E-mail address . Join and leave an IM group To join an IM group that yo u have saved, scroll to the group, and press . To join an IM group not on th e list, but for which you know the group ID, select Options > Join new group . Enter the group ID, and press . To leave the IM group, select Options > Leave IM group . Chat Once you have joined an IM group, you can view the messages that are exchanged there, and send your own messages. Options while chatting are Send , Send private msg. , Reply , Forward , Insert smiley , Send invitation , Leave IM group , Group , Record chat /Stop recording , Help , and Exit . To send a message, write th e message in the message editor field, and press . To send a private message to a participant, select Options > Send private msg. , select the recipient, write the message, and press . To reply to a private message sent to you, select the message, and select Options > Reply . To invite IM contacts who are online to join the IM group, select Options > Send invitation , select the contacts you want to invite, write the invitation message, and press . To prevent receiving messages from certain participants, select Options > Blocking options , and select from the following: Add to blocked list âÂÂTo block messages from the currently selected participant. Add ID to list manually âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the participant. Enter the ID, and press . View blocked list âÂÂTo see the participants whose messages are being blocked. Unblock âÂÂTo select the user that you want to remove from the blocked list. Press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 94 Record chats Options in the recorded chats view are Open , Delete , Send , Mark/Unmark , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . To record to a file the messa ges that are exchanged during a conversation or while you are joined in a IM group, select Options > Record chat , enter a name for the conversation file, and press . To stop recording, select Options > Stop recording . The recorded conversation file s are automatically saved in Recorded chats . To view the recorded chats, in the main view, select Recorded chats , select the conversation, and press . View and start conversations Go to the Conversations view to see a list of the individual conversation participants that you have an ongoing conversation with. To view a conversation, scroll to a participant, and press . Options when viewing a conversation are Send , Add to IM contacts , Insert smiley , Forward , Record chat / Stop recording , Blocking options , End conversation , Help , and Exit . To continue the conversati on, write your message, and press . To return to the conversati ons list without closing the conversation, select Back . To close the conversation, select Options > End conversation . Ongoing conversations are automatically closed when you exit IM . To start a new conversation, select Options > New conversation : Select recipient âÂÂTo see a list of your chat contacts that are currently online. Scroll to the contact that you want to start a conversation with, and press . Glossary: The user ID is provided by the service provider to those who register to this service. Enter user ID âÂÂTo enter the user ID of the user you want to start a conversation with, and press . To save a conversation partic ipant to your IM contacts, scroll to the partic ipant, and select Options > Add to IM contacts . To send automatic replies to incoming messages, select Options > Set auto reply on . Enter the text, and select Done . You can still receive messages.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 95 IM contacts Go to the IM contacts to retrieve chat contact lists from the server, or to add a new ch at contact to a contact list. When you log in to the server, the previously used chat contact list is retrieved fro m the server automatically. Options in the IM contacts view are Open conversation , Contact details , Change contact list , Reload users availability , Belongs to groups , New IM contact , Move to other list , Edit , Delete , Switch tracking on , Blocking options , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . To create a new contact, select Options > New IM contact > Enter manually . Fill in the Nickname and User ID fields, and select Done . To move a contact from a list on the server to the retrieved list, select Options > New IM contact > Move from other list . To change the chat contact list, select Options > Change contact list . Select from the following options: Open conversation âÂÂTo start a new conversation or continue an ongoing conver sation with the contact. Switch tracking on âÂÂTo have the phone notify you every time the chat contact goes online or offline. Belongs to groups âÂÂTo see which groups the chat contact has joined. Reload users availability âÂÂTo update information about whether the contact is online or offline. The online status is shown by an indicator next to the contact name. This option is not availabl e if you have set the Availability reloading to Automatic in IM settings . Manage IM groups Options in the IM groups view are Open , Join new group , Create new group , Leave IM group , Group , Search , Login / Logout , Settings , Help , and Exit . Go to the IM groups view to see a list of the IM groups that you have either saved or are currently joined to. Scroll to a group, select Options > Group and one of the following: Save âÂÂTo save an unsaved group that you are currently joined to. Delete âÂÂTo delete a saved or created group that you are currently not joined to. View participants âÂÂTo see who are currently joined to the group.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 96 Details âÂÂTo see the group ID, topic, participants, administrators of the group (s hown only if you have the editing rights), the list of bl ocked participants (shown only if you have the editing ri ghts), and whether private conversations are allowed in the group. Settings âÂÂTo view and edit the ch at group settings. See "Create a new IM group" , p. 96 . Administrate an IM group Create a new IM group Select IM groups > Options > Create new group . Enter the settings for the group. You can edit the settings fo r an IM group if you have administrator rights to the gr oup. The user who creates a group is automatically given administrator rights to it. Group name , Group topic , and Welcome note âÂÂTo add details that the participants se e when they join the group. Group size âÂÂTo define the maximum number of members allowed to join the group. Allow search âÂÂTo define if others ca n find the chat group by searching. Editing rights âÂÂTo define the chat group participants to whom you want to give rights to invite contacts to join the IM group and edit the group settings. Group members âÂÂSee "Add and remove group members" , p. 96 . Banned list âÂÂEnter the participants that are not allowed to join the IM group. Allow private msgs. âÂÂTo allow messaging between selected participants only. Group ID âÂÂThe group ID is created automatically and cannot be changed. Add and remove group members To add members to a group, select IM groups , scroll to an IM group, and select Options > Group > Settings > Group members > Selected only or All . To remove a member from th e IM group, scroll to the member, and select Options > Remove . To remove all members, select Options > Remove all . Chat server settings Select Options > Settings > Server settings . You may receive the settings in a sp ecial text message from the network operator or service provider that offers the chat service. You obtain the user ID and password from your service provider when you register to the service. If you do not know your user ID or pa ssword, contact your service provider.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. My own 97 To change the IM server to which you wish to connect, select Default server . To add a new server to your list of IM servers, select Servers > Options > New server . Enter the following settings: Server name âÂÂEnter the name for the chat server. Access point in use âÂÂSelect the access point you want to use for the server. Web address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the IM server. User ID âÂÂEnter your user ID. Password âÂÂEnter your login password.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 98 Connectivity Bluetooth connection You can connect wirelessly to other compatible devices with Bluetooth technology. Compatible devices may include mobile phones, comp uters, and enhancements such as headsets and car kits. You can use Bluetooth technology to send images, video clips, music and sound clips, and notes; to connect wirelessly to your compatible PC to, for example, transfer files; or to connect to a compatible printer to print images with Image print . See "Image print" , p. 57 . Since devices with Bluetoot h technology communicate using radio waves, your device and the other device do not need to be in direct line-o f-sight. The two devices only need to be within 10 metres of each other, although the connection may be subject to interference from obstructions such as walls or from other electronic devices. This device is compliant with Bluetooth Specification 1.2 supporting the following profil es: Basic Printing Profile, Generic Access Profile, Serial Port Profile, Dial-up Networking Profile, Headset Profile, Handsfree Profile, Generic Object Exchange Profile , Object Push Profile, File Transfer Profile, Basic Im aging Profile, and Human Interface Device Profile. To ensure interoperability between other devices suppor ting Bluetooth technology, use Nokia approved enhancements for this model. Check with the manufacturers of othe r devices to determine their compatibility with this device. Glossary: A profile corresponds to a service or a function, and defines how different devices connect. For example the Handsfree Profile is used between the handsfree device and th e phone. For devices to be compatible, they must support the same profiles. There may be restrictions on using Bluetooth technology in some locations. Check with your local authorities or service provider. Features using Bluetooth tech nology, or allowing such features to run in the ba ckground while using other features, increase the demand on battery power and reduce the battery life. When the device is locked, you cannot use the Bluetooth connection. See "Security" , p. 111 for more information on locking the device.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 99 Bluetooth connection settings Press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth . When you open the application for the first time, you are asked to define a name for your device. Select from the following: Bluetooth âÂÂSet to On or Off . To connect wirelessly to another compatible device, first set Bluetooth On , and then establish a connection. My phone's visibility âÂÂTo allow your device to be found by other devices with Bluetooth technology, select Shown to all . To hide it from other devices, select Hidden . My phone's name âÂÂEdit the name of your device. After you have set a Bluetoot h connection and changed My phone's visibility to Shown to all , your device and this name can be seen by other users with devices using Bluetooth technology. Security tips When you are not using Bl uetooth, set Bluetooth Off , or select My phone's visibility > Hidden . Do not pair with an unknown device. Send data using a Bluetooth connection There can be several active Bluetooth connections at a time. For example, if you are connected to a headset, you can also transfer files to anot her compatible device at the same time. Bluetooth connection indicators ⢠When is shown in the standby mode, a Bluetooth connection is active. ⢠When is blinking, your de vice is trying to connect to the other device. ⢠When is shown conti nuously, the Bluetooth connection is active. Tip! To send text using a Bluetooth connection (instead of text messages), open Notes , write the text, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . 1 Open an application where th e item you want to send is stored. For example, to send an image to another compatible device, open Gallery . 2 Select the item, for example an image, and select Options > Send > Via Bluetooth . Devices with Bluetooth technology that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. You can see a device icon, the name of the device, the device type, or a short name.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 100 Tip! If you have searched for devices earlier, a list of the devices that were found previously is shown first. To start a new search, select More devices . If you switch off the phone, the list is cleared. Device icons: âÂÂComputer; âÂÂPhone; âÂÂAudio or video; âÂÂHeadset; âÂÂOther. To interrupt the search, press Stop . The device list freezes. 3 Select the device with which you want to connect. 4 If the other device requires pairing before data can be transmitted, a tone sounds, and you are asked to enter a passcode. See "Pair devices" , p. 100 . 5 When the connection has been established, Sending data is shown. The Sent folder in Messaging does not store messages sent using a Bluetooth connection. Tip! When searching for devices, some devices may show only the unique addr esses (device addresses). To find the unique address of your phone, enter the code *#2820# in the standby mode. Pair devices Glossary: Pairing means authentication. The users of the two devices with Bluetooth technology should agree on a common passcod e, and use the same passcode for both devices in order to pair them. Devices that do not have a user interface have a factory-set passcode. In the Bluetooth main view, press to open the paired devices view ( ). Before pairing, create your own passcode (1âÂÂ16 digits), and agree with the owner of the other device to use the same code. The passcode is used only once. To pair with a device, select Options > New paired device . Devices with Bluetooth techno logy that are within range start to appear on the display one by one. Select the device, and enter the passcode. The same passcode must be entered on the other device as well. After pairing, the device is saved to the paired devices view. Paired devices are indicated by in the device search. Tip! To define a short name (nickname or alias) for a paired device, scroll to the device, and select Options > Assign short name in the paired devices view. This name helps you to recognise a certain device during device search or when a device requests a connection.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 101 To set a device to be authorised or unauthorised, scroll to a device, and select from the following options: Set as authorised âÂÂConnections between your device and this device can be made without your knowledge. No separate acceptance or authorisation is needed. Use this status for your own devices, such as your compatible headset or PC, or devices that belong to someone you trust. indicates authorised devices in the paired devices view. Set as unauthorised âÂÂConnection requests from this device must be accepted separately every time. To cancel a pairing, scroll to the device, and select Options > Delete . If you want to cancel all pairings, select Options > Delete all . Tip! If you are currently co nnected to a device and delete the pairing with that device, pairing is removed immediately and the connection will be switched off. Receive data using a Bluetooth connection When you receive data using a Bluetooth connection, a tone sounds, and you are asked if you want to accept the message. If you accept, is shown, and the item is placed in the Inbox folder in Messaging . Messages received using a Bluetooth co nnection are indicated by . See "InboxâÂÂreceive messages" , p. 69 . Switch off Bluetooth connectivity To switch off Bluetoot h connectivity, select Bluetooth > Off . PC connections You can use your device with a variety of PC connectivity and data communications applications. With Nokia PC Suite you can, for example, synchronise contacts, calendar and To-do notes, and transfer images between your device and a compatible PC. Always create the connection from the PC to synchronise with your device. For further information on ho w to install No kia PC Suite (compatible with Windows 200 0 and Windows XP), see the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite and the Nokia PC Suite help in the âÂÂInstallâ section on the CD-ROM.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 102 CD-ROM The CD-ROM should launch after you have inserted it into the CD-ROM drive of a compatib le PC. If not, proceed as follows: Open Windows Explor er, right-click the CD-ROM drive where you inserted the CD-ROM, and select Autoplay. Your device as a modem You can use your device as a modem to send and receive e-mail, or to connect to the In ternet with a compatible PC by using a Bluetooth connection or a data cable. Detailed installation instructions can be found in the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite in Modem options on the CD-ROM. Tip! When using Nokia PC Suite for the first time, to connect your device to a compatible PC and to use Nokia PC Suite, use th e Get Connected wizard available in Nokia PC Suite. See the CD-ROM supplied in the sales package. Connection manager You may have multiple data connections active at the same time when you are usin g your device in GSM and UMTS networks. Press , and select Connect. > Conn. mgr. to view the status of multiple data connections, view details on the amount of data sent and received, and end connections. When you open Conn. mgr. , you can see the following: ⢠Open data connections: data calls ( ) and packet data c o n n e c t i o n s () o r () . ⢠The status of each connection ⢠The amount of data uploaded and downloaded for each connection (shown for packet data connections only) ⢠The duration of each connec tion (shown for data calls only) Note: The actual time invoiced for calls by your service provider may vary, depending on network features, rounding off for billing, and so forth. To end a connection, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Disconnect . To close all currently op en connections, select Options > Disconnect all . View data connection details Options in the Conn. mgr. main view when there are one or more connections are Details , Disconnect , Disconnect all , Help , and Exit .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 103 To view the details of a conne ction, scroll to a connection, and select Options > Details . Name âÂÂThe name of the Internet access point (IAP) in use, or the modem connection name if the connection is a dial-up connection. Bearer âÂÂThe type of data connection: Data call , High sp. GSM , or Packet data . Status âÂÂThe current status of the connection: Connecting , Conn.(inact.) , Conn.(active) , On hold , Disconnctng. , or Disconnected . Received âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, received to your device. Sent âÂÂThe amount of data, in bytes, sent from your device. Duration âÂÂThe length of time that the connection has been open. Speed âÂÂThe current speed of both sending and receiving data in kilobytes per second. Dial-up âÂÂThe dial-up number used. Name âÂÂAccess point name used. Shared (not shown if the connection is not shared)âÂÂThe number of applications us ing the same connection. Remote synchronisation Press , and select Connect. > Sync . Sync enables you to synchronise your notes, ca lendar, and contacts with various calendar and addres s book applications on a compatible computer or on the Internet. The synchronisation applicatio n uses SyncML technology for synchronisation. For information on SyncML compatibility, contact the supplier of the calendar or address book application you want to synchronise your phone data with. You may receive syncronisation settings in a special text message. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . Create a new synchronisation profile Options in the Sync main view are Synchronise , New sync profile , Edit sync profile , Delete , View log , Set as default , Help , and Exit . 1 If no profiles have been defined, your device asks if you want to create a new profile. Select Yes . To create a new profile in addition to existing ones, select Options > New sync profile . Choose whether you want to use the default setting values or copy the values from an existing profile to be used as the basis for the new profile.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 104 2 Define the following: Sync profile name âÂÂWrite a descriptive name for the profile. Data bearer âÂÂSelect the connection type: Web , or Bluetooth . Access point (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect an access poin t to use for the data connection. Host address âÂÂThe IP address of the host server. Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. Port (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )â Contact your service provider or system administrator for the correct values. User name âÂÂYour user ID for the synchronisation server. Contact your service provider or system administrator for your correct ID. Password âÂÂWrite your password. Contact your service provider or system administ rator for the correct value. Allow sync requests âÂÂSelect Yes if you want to allow the server to start a synchronisation. Accept all sync reqs. âÂÂSelect No if you want your device to ask you before a synchronisation initialised by the server is started. Network authentic. (shown only if Data bearer is set to Web )âÂÂSelect Yes to enter a networ k user name and password. Press to view the user name and password fields. Press to select Contacts , Calendar , or Notes . ⢠Select Yes if you want to synchronise the selected database. ⢠In Remote database , enter a correct path to the remote calendar, address book, or notes database on the server. ⢠Select Synchronisation type : Normal (two-way synchronisation), To server only , or To phone only . 3 Select Back to save the settings and return to the main view. Synchronise data In the Sync main view, you can see the different synchronisation profiles and the kind of data to be synchronised. 1 Select a synchronisation profile and Options > Synchronise . The status of the synchronisation is shown at the bottom of the screen. To cancel synchronisation be fore it finishes, select Cancel .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Connectivity 105 2 You are notified when the sy nchronisation is complete. After synchronisation is complete, select Options > View log to open a log file showing the synchronisation status ( Complete or Incomplete ) and how many calendar or contact entries, or notes have been added, updated, deleted, or discar ded (not synchronised) in your device or on the server. Device manager Press , and select Connect. > Dev. mgr. . You may receive server profiles and different configuration settings from your network operator, service provider, or company information management department. These configuration settings may include access point settings for data connections and other sett ings used by different applications in your device. To connect to a server and re ceive configuration settings for your device, scroll to a profile, and select Options > Start configuration . To allow or deny receiving of configuration settings from service providers, select Options > Enable config. or Disable config. . Server profile settings Contact your service provider for the correct settings. Server name âÂÂEnter a name for the configuration server. Server ID âÂÂEnter the unique ID to identify the configuration server. Server password âÂÂEnter a password to identify your device to the server. Access point âÂÂSelect an access point to be used when connecting to the server. Host address âÂÂEnter the URL address of the server. Port âÂÂEnter the port number of the server. User name and Password âÂÂEnter your user name and password. Allow configuration âÂÂTo receive configuration settings from the server, select Yes . Auto-accept all reqs. âÂÂIf you want your device to ask for confirmation before acceptin g a configuration from the server, select No .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 106 Tools Settings To change settings, press , and select Tools > Settings . Scroll to a setting group, and press to open it. Scroll to a setting you want to change, and press . Phone settings General Phone language âÂÂChanging the language of the display texts in your phone also affe cts the format used for date and time and the separato rs used, for example, in calculations. Automatic selects the language according to the information on your SIM card. After you change the display text language, the phone restarts. Changing the settings for Phone language or Writing language affects every application in your phone, and the change remains effective unti l you change these settings again. Writing language âÂÂChanging the language affects the characters and special charac ters available when writing text and the predictive text dictionary used. Dictionary âÂÂYou can set the predictive text input On or Off for all editors in the ph one. The predictive text dictionary is not ava ilable for all languages. Welcome note or logo âÂÂThe welcome note or logo is displayed briefly each time you switch on the phone. Select Default to use the default image, Text to write a welcome note, or Image to select a photo or picture from Gallery . Orig. phone settings âÂÂYou can reset some of the settings to their original values. To do this, you need the lock code. See "Security" , "Phone and SIM" , p. 112 . After resetting, the phone may take a longer time to power on. Documents and files are unaffected. Standby mode Active standby âÂÂUse shortcuts to applications in the standby mode on the main display. See "Active standby mode" , p. 24 . Left selection key âÂÂTo assign a shortcut to the left selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list. Right selection key âÂÂTo assign a shortcut to the right selection key ( ) in the standby mode, select an application from the list.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 107 Active standby apps. âÂÂTo select the application shortcuts you want to appear in the acti ve standby. This setting is only available if Active standby is on. You can also assign keypad shortcuts for the different presses of the scroll key, by selecting an application from the list. The scroll key shortc uts are not available if the active standby is on. Operator logo âÂÂThis setting is visible only if you have received and saved an operator logo. You can choose if you want the operator logo to show or not. Display Brightness âÂÂYou can adjust the basic brightness level of the main display to lighter or darker. However, in extreme light conditions, the brig htness of the display is automatically adjusted. Power saver time-out âÂÂThe power saver on the main display is activated when the timeout period is over. Light time-out âÂÂSelect a time-out after which the backlight of the main display is switched off. Call settings Send my caller ID ( )âÂÂYou can set your phone number to be displayed to ( Yes ) or hidden from ( No ) the person to whom you are calling, or the value may be set by your network operator or service provider when you make a subscription ( Set by network ). Call waiting ( )âÂÂIf you have activated call waiting, the network notifies you of a ne w incoming call while you have a call in progress. Select Activate to request the network to activate call waiting, Cancel to request the network to deactivate call waiting, or Check status to check if the function is active or not. Reject call with SMS âÂÂSelect Yes to send a text message to a caller informing why yo u could not answer the call. See "Answer or reject a call" , p. 32 . Message text âÂÂWrite a text to be sent in a text message when you reject a call. Image in video call âÂÂYou can deny video sending when you receive a video call. Select a still image to be displayed instead of video.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 108 Automatic redial âÂÂSelect On , and your phone makes a maximum of ten attempts to connect the call after an unsuccessful call attempt. To stop automatic redialling, press . Summary after call âÂÂActivate this setting if you want the phone to briefly display the approximate duration of the last call. Speed dialling âÂÂSelect On , and the numbers assigned to the speed dialling keys ( - ) can be dialled by pressing and holding the key. See also "Speed dial a phone number" , p. 27 . Anykey answer âÂÂSelect On , and you can answer an incoming call by briefly pres sing any keypad key, except , , , and . Line in use ( )âÂÂThis setting is shown only if the SIM card supports two subscriber numbers, that is, two phone lines. Select which phone line you want to use for making calls and sending text messages . Calls on both lines can be answered irrespective of the selected line. If you select Line 2 and have not subscribed to this network service, you will not be able to make ca lls. When line 2 is selected, is shown in the standby mode. Tip! To switch between th e phone lines, press and hold in the standby mode. Line change ( )âÂÂTo prevent line selection, select Line change > Disable if supported by your SIM card. To change this setting, you need the PIN2 code. Connection settings Data connections and access points Your phone supports packet da ta connections ( ), such as GPRS in the GSM network. Glossary: General packet radio service (GPRS) uses packet data technology where information is sent in short packets of data ov er the mobile network. To establish a data connection, an access point is required. You can define different kind s of access points, such as: ⢠MMS access point to send and receive multimedia messages ⢠Access point for the Web a pplication to view WML or XHTML pages ⢠Internet access point (IAP) to send and receive e-mail Check the type of access point you need with your service provider for the service you wish to access. For availability and subscription to packet data connection services, contact your network operator or service provider.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 109 Packet data connections in GSM and UMTS networks When you use your phone in GSM and UMTS networks, multiple data connections can be active at the same time and access points can share a data connection. In the UMTS network, data connecti ons remain active during voice calls. To check the acti ve data connections, see "Connection manager" , p. 102 . The following indicators may be displayed below the signal indicator, depending on which network you use: GSM network, packet data is available in the network. GSM network, packet data co nnection is active, data is being transferred. GSM network, multiple pa cket data connections are active. GSM network, packet data connection is on hold. (This can happen during a voice call, for example.) UMTS network, packet data is available in the network. UMTS network, packet data connection is active, data is being transferred. UMTS network, multiple packet data connections are active. UMTS network, packet data connection is on hold. Receive access point settings You may receive access point settings in a text message from a service provider, or you may have preset access point settings in your phone. See "Data and settings" , p. 70 . To create a new access point, press , and select Tools > Settings > Connection > Access points . An access point may be prot ected ( ) by your network operator or service provider. Protected access points cannot be edited or deleted. Access points Tip! See also "Receive MMS and e-mail settings" , p. 68 , "E-mail" , p. 76 , and "Access the Web" , p. 82 . Follow the instructions given to you by your service provider. Connection name âÂÂGive a descriptive name for the connection. Data bearer âÂÂDepending on what data connection you select, only certain setting fiel ds are available. Fill in all fields marked with Must be defined or with a red asterisk. Other fields can be left empty, unless you have been instructed otherwise by your service provider. To be able to use a data connection, the network service provider must support this feature, and if necessary, activate it for your SIM card.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 110 Access point name (for packet data only)âÂÂThe access point name is needed to es tablish a connection to the packet data and UMTS networks. You obtain the access point name from your network operator or service provider. User name âÂÂThe user name may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually prov ided by the service provider. The user name is often case-sensitive. Prompt password âÂÂIf you must enter a new password every time you log in to a serv er, or if you do not want to save your password in the phone, select Yes . Password âÂÂA password may be needed to make a data connection, and is usually prov ided by the service provider. The password is often case-sensitive. Authentication âÂÂSelect Normal or Secure . Homepage âÂÂDepending on what you are setting up, write the Web address or the ad dress of the multimedia messaging centre. Select Options > Advanced settings to change the following settings: Network type âÂÂSelect the Internet protocol type to use: IPv4 settings or IPv6 settings . The other settings depend on the selected network type. Phone IP address (for IPv4)âÂÂEnter the IP address of your phone. Name servers âÂÂIn Primary name server: , enter the IP address of the primary DNS server. In Second. name server: , enter the IP address of the secondary DNS server. Contact your Internet servic e provider to obtain these addresses. Glossary: The domain name se rvice (DNS) is an Internet service that tran slates domain names such as www.nokia-asia.com into IP addresses like 192.100.124.195. Proxy serv. address âÂÂDefine the address for the proxy server. Proxy port number âÂÂEnter the proxy port number. Packet data The packet data settings affe ct all access points using a packet data connection. Packet data conn. âÂÂIf you select When available and you are in a network that supports packet data, the phone registers to the packet data network. Also, starting an active packet data connection is quicker (for example, to send and receive e-mail). If you select When needed , the phone uses a packet data conn ection only if you start an application or action that need s it. If there is no packet data coverage and you select When available , the phone periodically tries to establis h a packet data connection.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 111 Access point âÂÂThe access point name is needed to use your phone as a packet data modem to your computer. Configurations You may receive trusted server settings from your network operator or service provider in a configuration message, or the settings may be stored on your SIM or USIM card. You can save these settings to your phone, view or delete them in Configurations . Date and time See "Clock settings" , p. 15 . See also the language settings in "General" , p. 106 . Security Phone and SIM PIN code request âÂÂWhen active, the code is requested each time the phone is swit ched on. Deactivating the personal identification numbe r (PIN) code request may not be allowed by some SIM cards. See "Glossary of PIN and lock codes" , p. 112 . PIN code , PIN2 code , and Lock code âÂÂYou can change the lock code, PIN code, and PIN2 code. These codes can only include the numbers from 0 to 9. See "Glossary of PIN and lock codes" , p. 112 . Avoid using access codes similar to the emergency numbers to prevent accidental dialling of the emergency number. If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Autolock period âÂÂYou can set an autolock period, a time-out after which the ph one automatically locks and can be used only if the correct lock code is entered. Enter a number for the time-out in minutes, or select None to turn off the autolock period. To unlock the phone, enter the lock code. When the device is locked, calls may be possible to the official emergency number pr ogrammed into your device. Tip! To lock the phone manually, press . A list of commands opens. Select Lock phone . Lock if SIM changed âÂÂYou can set the phone to ask for the lock code when an unknown SIM card is inserted into your phone. The phone maintains a list of SIM cards that are recognised as the ownerâÂÂs cards. Closed user group ( )âÂÂYou can specify a group of people to whom you can call and who can call you.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 112 When calls are limited to closed user groups, calls still may be possible to the official emergency number programmed into your device. Confirm SIM services ( )âÂÂYou can set the phone to display confirmation message s when you are using a SIM card service. Glossary of PIN and lock codes If you forget any of these codes, contact your service provider. Personal identification number (PIN) codeâÂÂThis code protects your SIM card against unauthorised use. The PIN code (4 to 8 digits) is usua lly supplied with the SIM card. After three consecutive incorrec t PIN code entries, the PIN code is blocked, and you need to unblock it before you can use the SIM card again. See the information about the PUK code in this section. UPIN codeâÂÂThis code may be supplied with the USIM card. T h e U S I M c a r d i s a n e n h a n c e d v e r s i o n o f t h e S I M c a r d a n d is supported by UMTS mob ile phones. The UPIN code protects the USIM card against unauthorised use. PIN2 codeâÂÂThis code (4 to 8 digits) is supplied with some SIM cards, and is required to access some functions in your phone. Lock code (also known as secu rity code)âÂÂThis code (5 digits) can be used to lock th e phone to avoid unauthorised use. The factory setting for the lock code is 12345 . To avoid unauthorised use of yo ur phone, change the lock code. Keep the new code se cret and in a safe place separate from your phone. Personal unblocking key (PUK ) code and PUK2 codeâÂÂThese codes (8 digits) are required to change a blocked PIN code or PIN2 code, respectively. If the codes are not supplied with the SIM card, contact the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. UPUK codeâÂÂThis code (8 digits ) is required to change a blocked UPIN code. If the co de is not supplied with the USIM card, contact the operato r whose USIM card is in your phone. Certificate management Digital certificates do not guar antee safety; they are used to verify the origin of software. Glossary: Digital certificates are used to verify the origin of the XHTML or WML pages and installed software. However, they can only be trusted if the origin of the certificate is known to be authentic. In the certificate management main view, you can see a list of authority cert ificates that are stor ed in your phone. Press to see a list of person al certificates, if available.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 113 Options in the certificate management main view are Certificate details , Delete , Trust settings, Mark/Unmark , Help , and Exit . Digital certificates should be used if you want to connect to an online bank or another site or remote server for actions that involve transferri ng confidential information. The y sho uld a lso b e use d if y ou w ant t o red uce t he r isk o f viruses or other malicious so ftware and be sure of the authenticity of software when downloading and installing software. Important: Even if the use of certificates makes the risks involved in remote connections and software installation considerably smaller, they must be used correctly in order to benefit from increased security. The existence of a certificate does not offer any protection by itself; the certificate manager must contain correct, authentic, or trusted certificates for increased security to be available. Certificates have a restricted lifetime. If Expired certificate or Certificate not valid yet is shown even if the certific ate should be valid, check that the current date and time in your device are correct. View certificate detailsâÂÂcheck authenticity You can only be sure of the correct identity of a server when the signature and the peri od of validity of a server certificate have been checked. You are notified on the phone display if the identity of the server is not authentic or if you do not have the correct security certificate in your phone. To check certificate details, sc roll to a certificate, and select Options > Certificate details . When you open certificate details, the validity of the certificate is checked, and one of the following notes may be displayed: ⢠Certificate not trusted âÂÂYou have not set any application to use the certificate. See "Change the trust settings" , p. 113 . ⢠Expired certificate âÂÂThe period of validity has ended for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate not valid yet âÂÂThe period of validity has not yet begun for the selected certificate. ⢠Certificate corrupted âÂÂThe certificate cannot be used. Contact the certificate issuer. Change the trust settings Before changing any certific ate settings, you must make sure that you really trust the owner of the certificate and that the certificate really belongs to the listed owner.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 114 Scroll to an authority certificate, and select Options > Trust settings . Depending on the certificate, a list of the applications that can use the se lected certificate is shown. For example: ⢠Symbian installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Symbian operating system application. ⢠Internet : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify servers. ⢠App. installation : Yes âÂÂThe certificate is able to certify the origin of a new Java application. Select Options > Edit trust setting to change the value. Call diverting Call divert allows you to divert your incoming calls to your voice mailbox or another phone number. For details, contact your service provider. 1 Press , and select Tools > Settings > Call divert . 2 Select which calls you want to divert: Voice calls , Data and video calls , or Fax calls . 3 Select the desired divert op tion. To divert voice calls w h e n y o u r n u m b e r i s b u s y o r w h e n y o u r e j e c t i n c o m i n g calls, select If busy . 4 Set the divert option on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is activated ( Check status ). Several divert options can be active at the same time. When all calls are diverted, is shown in the standby mode. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. Call barring Call barring allows you to restrict the calls that you make or receive with the phone. To change the settings, you need the barring password from your service provider. Select the desired barring option, and set it on ( Activate ) or off ( Cancel ), or check whether the option is active ( Check status ). Call barring affects all calls, including data calls. Call barring and call diverting cannot be active at the same time. When calls are barred, calls still may be possible to certain official emergency numbers.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 115 Network Your phone can automatically switch between the GSM and UMTS networks. The GSM network is indicated with in the standby mode. The UMTS network is indicated with . Network mode (shown only if supported by the operator)âÂÂSelect which network to use. If you select Dual mode , the phone uses the GSM or UMTS network automatically, according to the network parameters and the roaming agreements between the network operators. Contact your network operator for more details. Operator selection âÂÂSelect Automatic to set the phone to search for and select one of the available networks, or Manual to manually select the network from a list of networks. If the connection to the manually selected network is lost, the phone soun ds an error tone and asks you to reselect a network. Th e selected network must have a roaming agreement with your home network, that is, the operator whose SIM card is in your phone. Glossary: A roaming agreement is an agreement between two or more network service providers to enable the users of one se rvice provider to use the services of other service providers. Cell info display âÂÂSelect On to set the phone to indicate when it is used in a cellular network based on microcellular network (MCN) technology and to activate cell info reception. Enhancement settings Indicators shown in the standby mode: A headset is connected. A loopset is connected. The headset is unavailable, or a Bluetooth connection to a headset is lost. Select Headset , Loopset , or Bluetooth handsfree , and the following options are available: Default profile âÂÂTo set the profile that you want activated each time you connect a ce rtain enhancement to your phone. See "ProfilesâÂÂSet tones" , p. 22 . Automatic answer âÂÂTo set the phone to answer an incoming call automatically after 5 seconds. If the Ringing type is set to Beep once or Silent , automatic answer is disabled.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 116 Cover display settings Brightness âÂÂTo change the brightness of the cover display, close the fold, and adjust the brightness on the cover display with the joystick. Wallpaper âÂÂSelect the background image and how time is displayed on the cover display in the standby mode. Power saver âÂÂSelect the cover display power saver type, its time-out period, and if an im age or an animation screen saver is shown after the time -out period before the power saver is activated. Voice commands You can use voice commands to control your phone. For more information about the enhanced voice commands supported by your phone, see "Voice dialling" , p. 27 . To activate enhanced vo ice commands for starting applications or profil es, you must open the Voice com. application and its Profiles folder. Press , and select Tools > Voice com. > Profiles ; the phone creates voice tags for the applications an d profiles. You can now use enhanced voice commands by pressing and holding the capture key and saying a voice command. The voice command is the name of th e application or profile displayed in the list. To add more applications to the list, select Options > New application . To add a second voice command that can be used to start the application, scroll to it, select Options > Change command , and enter the new voice command as text. Avoid very short names, abbreviations, and acronyms. To change voice command settings, select Options > Settings . To switch off the synthesiser that plays recognised voice tags and co mmands in the selected phone language, select Synthesiser > Off . To reset voice recognition learning, for exampl e, when the main user of the phone has changed, select Remove my adapts. . Application manager Press , and select Tools > Manager . You can install two types of applications and software to your phone: ⢠J2ME⢠applications based on Java⢠technology with the extension .jad or .jar ( ). ⢠Other applications and software suitable for the Symbian operating system ( ) . The installation files have the .sis extension. Only install software specifically designed for your Nokia N90. Software providers will often refer to the official model number of this product: the Nokia N90-1.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 117 Installation files may be tran sferred to your phone from a compatible computer, downloaded during browsing, or sent to you in a multimedia message, as an e-mail attachment, or using a Bluetooth connection. You can use Nokia Application Installer in Nokia PC Suite to install an application to your phone or a memory card. If you use Microsoft Windows Explorer to transfer a file, save the file to a memory card (local disk). Example: If you have received the installation file as an e-mail attachment, go to your mailbox, open the e-mail, open the attachme nts view, scroll to the installation file, and pre ss to start installation. Install applications and software Tip! You can also use Nokia Application Installer available in Nokia PC Suit e to install applications. See the CD-ROM supplied with the phone. Application icons are as fo llows: .sis application; Java application; applicat ion is not fully installed; application is installed on the memory card. Important: Only install and use applications and other software from sources that offer adequate security and protection against harmful software. Before installation, note the following: ⢠To view the application ty pe, version number, and the supplier or manufacturer of the application, select Options > View details . ⢠To display the security certificate details of the application, select Options > View certificate . See "Certificate management" , p. 112 . ⢠If you install a file that contains an update or repair to an existing application, you can only restore the original application if you ha ve the original installation file or a full back-up copy of the removed software package. To restore the original application, remove the application, and install th e application again from the original installation fi le or the back-up copy. ⢠The .jar file is required fo r installing Java applications. If it is missing, the phone may ask you to download it. If there is no access point defined for the application, you are asked to select one. When you are downloading the .jar file, you may need to enter a user name and password to access the se rver. You obtain these from the supplier or manufacturer of the application. 1 Open Manager , and scroll to an installation file. Alternatively, search the ph one memory or the memory card in File mgr. , or open a message in Messaging > Inbox that contains an installation file.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 118 Select the application, and press to start the installation. Tip! While browsing, you can download an installation file and inst all it without closing the connection. 2 Select Options > Install . During installation, the phone shows information about the progress of the installation. If you are installing an application wi thout a digital signature or certification, the phone disp lays a warning. Continue installation only if you ar e sure of the origin and contents of the application. To start an installed application, locate it in the menu, and press . To start a network connec tion and to view extra information about the applicatio n, scroll to it, and select Options > Go to web address , if available. To see what software packag es have been installed or removed and when, select Options > View log . T o s e n d y o u r i n s t a l l a t i o n l o g t o a h e l p d e s k s o t h a t t h e y c a n see what has been installed or removed, select Options > Send log > Via text message or Via e-mail (available only if the correct e-mail se ttings are in place). Remove applications and software Scroll to a software package, and select Options > Remove . Select Yes to confirm. If you remove software, you can only reinstall it if you have the original software packag e or a full backup of the removed software package. If you remove a software package, you may no longer be able to open documents created with that software. Note: If another software package depends on the software package that you removed, the other software package may stop working. Refer to the documentation of the installed software package for details. Application settings Select Options > Settings and from the following: Software installation âÂÂSelect if Symbian software can be installed: On , Signed only , or Off . Online certif. check âÂÂSelect to check the online certificates before in stalling an application. Default web address âÂÂSet the default address used when checking online certificates.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Tools 119 Some Java applications may require a phone call, a message to be sent, or a netw ork connection to a specific access point for downloading extra data or components. In the Manager main view, scroll to an application, and select Options > Suite settings to change settings related to that specific application. Activation keysâÂÂhandle copyright-protected files Copyright protections may pr event some images, music (including ringing tones), an d other content from being copied, modified, transferred or forwarded. Press , and select Tools > Activ. keys to view the digital rights activation keys stored in your phone: ⢠Valid keys ( ) are connected to one or more media files. ⢠With expired keys ( ), you have no time to use the media file, or the time pe riod for using the file is exceeded. To view the Expired activation keys, press . To buy more usage time or extend the usage period for a media file, select an activation key, and Options > Activate content . Activation keys ca nnot be updated if Web service message rece ption is disabled. See "Web service messages" , p. 78 . To view which keys are no t in use at the moment ( Not used ), press twice. Unused activation keys have no media files connected to them saved in the phone. To view detailed information su ch as the validity status and ability to send the file, se lect an activation key, and press .
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Troubleshooting 120 Troubleshooting Q&A Bluetooth connectivity Q: Why canâÂÂt I find my friendâÂÂs device? A: Check that both devices have activated Bluetooth connectivity. Check that the distance between the two devices is not over 10 metres and that there are no walls or other obstructions between the devices. Check that the other device is not in hidden mode. Check that both devices are compatible. Q: Why canâÂÂt I end a Bluetooth connection? A: If another device is connected to your phone, you can either end the connection usin g the other device or by deactivating Bluetooth connect ivity. Press , and select Connect. > Bluetooth > Off . Multimedia messaging Q: What should I do when the phone cannot receive a multimedia message beca use memory is full? A: The amount of memory needed is indicated in the error message: Not enough memory to retrieve message. Delete some data first. To view what kind of data you have and how much memory the different data groups consume, press , and select Tools > File manager > Options > Memory details . Q: The note Retrieving message is shown briefly. What is happening? A: The phone is trying to retr ieve a multimedia message from the multimedia messaging centre. Check that the settings for multimedia messaging are defined correctly and that there are no mistakes in phone numbers or addresses. Press , and select Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message . Q: How can I end the data connection when the phone starts a data connection again and again? A: To stop the phone from making a data connection, select : Messaging > Options > Settings > Multimedia message > Multimedia retrieval âÂÂTo control the retrieval of multimedia messages manually, select Manual . When you receive a multimedia message, the phone asks whether you w a n t t o r e t r i e v e i t o r n o t . To reject all incoming multimedia messages, select Off . Messaging > Options > Settings > E-mail settings > Mailboxes > Automatic retrieval > Header retrieval > Off âÂÂTo disable automatic header retrieval. You can still retrieve headers to your phone manually.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Troubleshooting 121 Messaging Q: Why canâÂÂt I select a contact? A: The contact card may not have a phone number or an e-mail address. Add the missing information to the contact card in Contacts . Entries that are saved only on the SIM card are not shown in the contacts directory. To copy contacts from the SIM card to Contacts , see "Copy contacts" , p. 38 . Camera Q: Why do images look smudgy? A: Ensure that the camera lens protection window is clean. Q: Why is the camera applicat ion not in the main menu? A: In the standby mode, the camera application is started when you activate the Imagin g mode or the Camera mode. See "Modes" , p. 11 . Calendar Q: Why are the week numbers missing? A: If you have changed the calend ar settings so that the week starts on a day other than Monday, the week numbers are not shown. Browser services Q: What do I do if the followi ng message is displayed: No valid access point defined. Define one in Web settings. ? A: Insert the correct browser settings. Contact your service provider for instructions. Log Q: Why does the log appear empty? A: You may have activated a filter, and no communication events fitting that filter have been logged. To see all events, press , and select My own > Log . Scroll right, and select Options > Filter > All communication . Q: How do I delete my log information? A: To clear the log, press , and select My own > Log . Scroll right, and select Options > Clear log or go to Settings > Log duration > No log . These will erase the log contents, recent calls register, and message delivery reports permanently. PC connectivity Q: Why do I have problems in co nnecting the phone to my PC? A: Make sure that Nokia PC Suite is installed and running on your PC. See the User Guide for Nokia PC Suite on the CD-ROM. If Nokia PC Suite is installed and running, you can use Nokia Get connected wizard available in Nokia PC Suite to connect to your PC . For further information on how to use Nokia PC Suite, see the help function on Nokia PC Suite or visit the support pages at www.nokia-asia.com. Access codes Q: What is my password for the lock, PIN, or PUK codes? A: The default lock code is 12345 . If you forget or lose the lock code, contact your phone dealer.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Troubleshooting 122 If you forget or lose a PIN or PUK code, or if you have not received such a code, contact your network service provider. For information about passwords, contact your access point provider, for example, a commercial Internet service provider (ISP), service provider, or network operator. Application not responding Q: How do I close an application that is not responding? A: Open the application switch ing window by pressing and holding . Then scroll to the application, and press to close the application. Display Q: Why do missing, discoloured, or bright dots appear on the screen every time I turn on my phone? A: This is a characteristic of this type of display. Some displays may contain pixels or dots that remain on or off. This is normal, not a fault. Memory low Q: What can I do if my phone memory is low? A: You can delete the following items regularly to avoid memory getting low: ⢠Messages from Inbox , Drafts , and Sent folders in Messaging ⢠Retrieved e-mail messages from the phone memory ⢠Saved browser pages ⢠Images and photos in Gallery To delete contact information, ca lendar notes, call timers, call cost timers, game scores, or any other data, go to the respective application to remove the data. If you are deleting multiple items and any of the following notes are shown: Not enough memory to perform operation. Delete some data first. or Memory low. Delete some data. , try deleting items one by one (starting from the smallest item). Q: How can I save my data before deleting it? A: Save your data using one of the following methods: ⢠Use Nokia PC Suite to make a back up copy of all data to a compatible computer. ⢠Send images to your e-mail address, and then save the images to your computer. ⢠Send data using a Bluetooth connection to a compatible device. ⢠Store data on a compatible memory card.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information 123 Battery information Charging and discharging Your device is powered by a rechargeable battery. The full performance of a new battery is achieved only after two or three complete charge and discharge cycles. The battery can be charged and discharged hundreds of times but it will eventually wear out. When th e talk and standby times are noticeably shorter than normal , replace the battery. Use only Nokia approved batteries, and rech arge your battery only with Nokia approved chargers designated for this device. Unplug the charger from the electrical plug and the device when not in use. Do not leave fully charged battery connected to a charger, since overcharging may shorten its lifetime. If left unused, a fully charged battery will lose its charge over time. If the battery is completely discharged, it may take a few minutes before the charging in dicator appears on the display or before any calls can be made. Use the battery only for its intended purpose. Never use any charger or battery that is damaged. Do not short-circuit the battery. Accidental short-circuiting can occur when a metallic object such as a coin, clip, or pen causes direct connection of th e positive ( ) and negative (-) terminals of the battery. (These look like metal strips on the battery.) This might happen, for example, when you carry a spare battery in your pocket or purse. Short-circuiting the terminals may damage the batt ery or the connecting object. Leaving the battery in hot or cold places, such as in a closed car in summer or winter conditions, will reduce the capacity and lifetime of the battery. Always try to keep the battery between 15ðC and 25ðC (59ðF and 77ðF). A device with a hot or cold battery may not work temporarily, even when the battery is fully charged. Battery performance is particularly limited in temperatures well below freezing. Do not dispose of batteries in a fire as they may explode. Batteries may also explode if damaged. Dispose of batteries according to local regulations. Please recycle when possible. Do not dispose as household waste. Nokia battery authentication guidelines Always use original Nokia batter ies for your safety. To check that you are getting an original Nokia battery, purchase it from an authorized Nokia dealer, look for the Nokia Original Enhancements logo on the packaging and inspect the hologram label using the following steps:
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information 124 Authenticate hologram 1 When looking at the hologram on the label, you should see the Nokia connecting hands symbol from one angle and the Nokia Original Enhancements logo when looking from another angle. 2 When you angle the hologram left, right, down, and up, you should see 1, 2, 3, and 4 dots on each side respectively. Nokia battery, you should refrain from using it . Successful completion of the steps is not a total assurance of the authenticity of the battery. If you have any reason to believe that your battery is not an authentic original If authenticity cannot be verified, return the battery to the place of purchase.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Battery information 125 What if your battery is not authentic? If you cannot confirm that your Nokia battery with the hologram on the label is an au thentic Nokia battery, please do warranty applying to the device. To find out more about original Nokia batteries, visit not use the battery. The use of a battery that is not approved by the manufacturer may be dangerous and may result in poor performance and damage to your device and its enhancements. It may al so invalidate any approval or www.nokia-asia.com/batterycheck.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements 126 Nokia original enhancements A new extensive range of enhancements is available for your phone. Select the enha ncements which accommodate your specific communication needs. List of compatible enhancements: Audio Headset HS-5 Boom Headset HDB-4 FM Radio Headset HS-2R Wireless Headset HDW-3 Wireless Clip-on Headset HS-21W Wireless Boom Headset HS-4W Wireless Headset HS-11W Wireless Image Headset HS-13W Inductive Loopset LPS-4 TTY Adapter HDA-10 Car Headrest Handsfree BHF-3 Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-3 Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W Wireless Car Kit CK-1W Advanced Car Kit CK-7W Mobile Charger (LCH-12 update) DC-4 Covers Non-changeable covers Data Wireless GPS Module LD-1W Connectivity Cable DKU-2 128 MB MultiMediaCard MU-2 256 MB MultiMediaCard MU-9 Imaging Nokia Remote Camera PT-6 Messaging Wireless Keyboard SU-8W Digital Pen SU-1B Power Compact Charger AC-3
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements 127 Some of the enhancements are described in detail below. For availability of the enhanc ements, please check with your local dealer. A few prac tical rules for enhancements operation: ⢠Keep the enhancements out of small children's reach. ⢠When you disconnect the power cord of any accessory, grasp and pull the plug, not the cord. ⢠Check regularly that all mobile phone equipment in a vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Use only batteries, chargers and enhancements approved by the phone manufacturer. The use of any other types may invalidate any approval or warranty applying to the phone, and may be dangerous . Battery # Variation in operation ti mes may occur depending on SIM card, network and usage settings, usage style and environments. Nokia Wireless Boom Headset HS-4W Type Tech Talktime# Standby# BL-5B Li-Ion up to 4 hours 30 mins (GSM), up to 2 hours 20 mins (WCDMA) up to 10 days
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements 128 Gain more freedom with the Nokia Wireless Boom Headset. Whether rushing to a meeting or just out for a stroll, you don't have to go searching th rough your bag or your coat to take the call. Handsfree convenience make this light, comfortable headset a pleasure to use. It's elegant, comfortable tech nology finely honed to the needs and rhythms of your life, both business and pleasure. Don't miss a stride. ⢠Stylish, comfortable wireless headset ⢠Bluetooth wireless technology ⢠Convenient call handling from the headset ⢠Effortless handsfree functionality ⢠Switches easily from one ear to the other ⢠LED light for status indication Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree HF-6W Get on the road with the Nokia Wireless Plug-in Car Handsfree. This compact unit communicates with your compatible phone via Blue tooth wireless technology within a 10-meter range. "S peech tracking" uses four microphones selecting from 19 di rections to lock on to the direction from which speech is coming and filter out any unwanted background noise co ming from other areas. Plus it's easy to install - just plug it in to the vehicle's lighter socket.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Nokia original enhancements 129 Key Features: ⢠Wireless connection to comp atible phone via Bluetooth technology ⢠Speech tracking technology reduces background noise ⢠Answer and end calls an d adjust volume from integrated buttons ⢠One-step installation: plugs in to vehicle lighter socket ⢠Retractable cable to charge your compatible phone on the go Nokia Wireless Keyboard SU-8W Improve your productivity with the Nokia Wireless Keyboard. Write email, text messages, or meeting notes quickly and easily with a fu ll QWERTY keyboard. With a small, foldable, lightweight design, the Nokia Wireless Keyboard is comfortable to carry and use, which makes it a perfect tool for your mobile wireless office. Key Features: ⢠Foldable, lightweight QWERTY keyboard ⢠Power on/off key plus automatic power-off when folded ⢠Short-cut keys for messagi ng and main application menu of compatible phone ⢠Wireless connection to compatible phone (Bluetooth wireless technology) ⢠3 LED's representing: Power on/off, wireless connection status, battery status ⢠Powered by 2 x AAA batteries
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Care and maintenance 130 Care and maintenance Your device is a product of su perior design and craftsmanship and should be treated with ca re. The suggestions below will help you protect your warranty coverage. ⢠Keep the device dry. Precipit ation, humidity and all types of liquids or moisture can contain minerals that will corrode electronic circuits. If your device does get wet, remove the battery and allow the device to dry completely before replacing it. ⢠Do not use or store the device in dusty, dirty areas. Its moving parts and electronic components can be damaged. ⢠Do not store the device in hot areas. High temperatures can shorten the life of electronic devices, damage batteries, and warp or melt certain plastics. ⢠Do not store the device in cold areas. When the device returns to its normal temper ature, moisture can form inside the device and damage electronic circuit boards. ⢠Do not attempt to open the devi ce other than as instructed in this guide. ⢠Do not drop, knock, or shake the device. Rough handling can break internal circuit boards and fine mechanics. ⢠Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong detergents to clean the device. ⢠Do not paint the device. Paint can clog the moving parts and prevent proper operation. ⢠Use a soft, clean, dry cloth to clean any lenses, such as camera, proximity sensor, and light sensor lenses. ⢠Use only the supplied or an approved replacement antenna. Unauthorized ante nnas, modifications, or attachments could damage the device and may violate regulations governing radio devices. ⢠Use chargers indoors. ⢠Always create a backup of data you want to keep, such as contacts and calendar notes, before sending your device to a service facility. All of the above suggestions a pply equally to your device, battery, charger, or any enhancement. If any device is not working properly, take it to the nearest authorized service facility for service.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information 131 Additional safety information Your device and its enhancemen ts may contain small parts. Keep them out of the reach of small children. Operating environment Remember to follow any specia l regulations in force in any area and always switch off your device when its use is prohibited or when it may cause interference or danger. Use the device only in its normal operating positions. This device meets RF exposure guidelines wh en used either in the normal use position against the ear or when positioned at least 1.5 cm (5/8 inch) away from the body. Wh en a carry case, belt clip or holder is used for body-worn op eration, it should not contain metal and should position th e device the above-stated distance from your body. In order to transmit data files or messages, this device requires a good quality connection to th e network. In some cases, transmission of data files or messages may be delayed until such a connection is available. Ensure the above separation distance instructions are follo wed until the transmission is completed. Parts of the device are magnet ic. Metallic materials may be attracted to the device, and pers ons with a hearing aid should not hold the device to the ear with the hearing aid. Do not place credit cards or other magnetic storage media near the device, because information stored on them may be erased. Medical devices Operation of any radio transm itting equipment, including wireless phones, may interfere with the functionality of inadequately protected medical de vices. Consult a physician or the manufacturer of the medical device to determine if they are adequately shielded from extern al RF energy or if you have any questions. Switch off your device in health care facilities when any regulations posted in th ese areas instruct you to do so. Hospitals or health care fa cilities may be using equipment that could be sensitive to external RF energy. Pacemakers Pacemaker manufacturers recommend that a minimum separation of 15.3 cm (6 inches) be maintained between a wireless phone and a pacemaker to avoid potential interference with the pacemaker. These recommendations are consistent with the inde pendent research by and recommendations of Wireless Technology Research. Persons with pacemakers should do the following: ⢠Always keep the device more than 15.3 cm (6 inches) from their pacemaker; ⢠Not carry the device in a breast pocket; ⢠Hold the device to the ear opposite the pacemaker to minimize the potential for interference. If you suspect interference, switch off your device and move the device away.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information 132 Hearing aids Some digital wireless devices may interfere with some hearing aids. If in terference occurs, consult your service provider. Vehicles RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles such as electronic fuel injectio n systems, electronic antiskid (antilock) braking systems, electronic spee d control systems, and air bag systems. For more information, check with the manufacturer or its representative of your ve hicle or any equipment that has been added. Only qualified personnel should service the device, or install the device in a vehicle. Faulty installation or service may be dangerous and may invalidate an y warranty that may apply to the device. Check regularly that all wireless device equipment in your vehicle is mounted and operating properly. Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device , its parts, or enhancements. For vehicles equipped with an ai r bag, remember that air bags inflate with great force. Do not place objec ts, including installed or portable wireless equipment in the area over the air bag or in the air bag deployme nt area. If in-vehicle wireless equipment is improperly instal led and the air bag inflates, serious injury could result. Using your device while flying in aircraft is prohibited. Switch off your device before boarding an aircraft. The use of wireless teledevices in an aircraft may be dangerous to the operation of the aircraft, disrupt the wi reless telephone network, and may be illegal. Potentially explosive environments Switch off your device when in any area with a potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and instructions. Potentially explosive atmospheres include areas where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle engine. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Switch off the device at refueling points such as near gas pumps at service stations. Observe restrictions on the use of radio equipment in fuel depots, storage, and distribution areas, chemical plants or where blasting operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive atmosphere are often but not always clearly marked. They include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage faciliti es, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as propane or butane), and areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information 133 Emergency calls Important: Wireless phones, in cluding this device, operate using radio signal s, wireless networks, landline networks, and user-programmed functions. Because of this, connections in all conditions cannot be guar anteed. You should never rely solely on any wire less device for essential communications like medical emergencies. To make an emergency call: 1 If the device is not on, switch it on. Check for adequate signal strength. Some networks may require that a valid SIM card is properly inserted in the device. 2 Press the end key as many t imes as needed to clear the display and ready the device for calls. 3 Enter the official emergency number for your present location. Emergency numbers vary by location. 4 Press the call key. If certain features are in use, you may first need to turn those features off before you can make an emergency call. Consult this guide or your service provider for more information. When making an emergency call, give all the necessary information as accurately as possible. Your wireless device may be the only means of comm unication at the scene of an accident. Do not end the call unt il given permission to do so. Warning: In the offline profile you cannot make (or receive) any calls, excep t make calls to certain emergency numbers, or use other features that require network coverage. Warning: You cannot make emergency calls in the Imaging mode, because the keypad is not active. To make an emergency call, ac tivate the Fold open mode.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. Additional safety information 134 Certification information (SAR) THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio frequency (RF) recommended by international guidelines (ICNIRP). These limits are part of comprehensive guidelines and esta blish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines were developed by independent scien tific organisations through periodic and thorough evaluati on of scientific studies. The guidelines include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all person s, regardless of age and health. The exposure standard for mobile devices employs a unit of measurement known as the Specifi c Absorption Ra te, or SAR. The SAR limit stated in the international guidelines is 2.0 watts/kilogram (W/kg)*. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the de vice while operating can be well below the maximum value. This is because the device is designed to operate at multiple pow er levels so as to use only the power required to reach the ne twork. In general, the closer you are to a base station, the lower the power output of the device. The highest SAR value for this device when tested for use at the ear is 0.29 W/kg. SAR values may vary dependin g on national reporting and testing requirements and the network band. Use of device accessories and enhancements may result in different SAR values. Additional SAR information may be provided under product information at www.nokia.com. * The SAR limit for mobile device s used by the public is 2.0 W/ kg averaged over 10 grams of body tissue. The guidelines incorporate a substantial margin of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in measurements. SAR values may vary depending on national reporting requirements and the network band. For SAR information in other regions please look under product information at www.nokia.com.
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 135 Index A access points 108 settings 109 activation keys 119 alarms alarm clock 15 calendar 80 applications installing 117 Java 116 B backing up 18 Bluetooth 98 connecting two devices, pairing 100 device address 100 factory set passcode 100 headset 115 pairing 100 passcode, glossary explanation 100 security 99 switching off 101 bookmarks 83 brightness display 107 , 116 setting in camera 49 C cache, clearing 86 calendar alarm 79 creating entries 79 synchronising PC Suite 80 call register See log calls dialled numbers 35 duration 35 international 26 received 35 settings 107 settings for call divert 114 transferring 34 camera adjusting brightness 49 adjusting colour and lighting 44 adjusting lighting and colour 41 , 43 adjusting video recorder settings 50 camera mode 13 edit videos 51 flash 44 image setup settings 44 imaging mode 12 saving video clips 50 scenes 44 self-timer 43 sending images 43 sequence mode 43 still image camera settings 45 video shortcuts 50 camera mode 46 adjusting image settings 47 CD-ROM 102 certificates 112 chat See instant messaging clear screen See standby mode clearing memory log information 121
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 136 clock 15 alarm 15 settings 15 codes 111 lock code PIN code 112 PIN2 code 112 security code 112 computer connections 101 conference call 27 connection settings 108 contact cards 37 inserting pictures 37 sending 38 storing DTMF tones 34 copying contacts between the SIM card and device memory 38 text 66 copyright protection see activation keys cutting text 66 D data connections details 102 ending 102 indicators 13 date 15 digital rights management, DRM see activation keys DNS, domain name service, glossary explanation 110 E editing videos adding effects 51 adding sound clips 51 adding transitions 51 custom video clips 51 e-mail 67 automatic retrieving 72 offline 73 opening 72 remote mailbox 71 retrieving from mailbox 71 settings 76 viewing attachments 72 F file formats .jad 116 .jar 116 , 117 .sis 116 RealOne Player 58 file manager 17 fixed dialling 39 fold 11 , 12 G gallery ordering files in albums 56 H handsfree see loudspeaker headset settings 115 help application 15 I indicators 13 instant messaging 91 blocking 93 connecting to a server 92 groups 95 recording messages 94 sending instant messages 93 user ID, glossary explanation 94 Internet See Web Internet access points (IAP) See access points IP address, glossary explanation 110
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 137 J Java See applications L lock code 112 log erasing contents 36 filtering 36 log duration 36 loopset settings 115 loudspeaker 16 M mailbox 71 automatic retrieving 72 media files fast forward 59 file formats 58 mute sound 59 rewind 59 memory clearing memory 35 viewing memory consumption 17 memory card 18 memory card adapter see the Quick Start Guide, reduced- size MultiMediaCard adapter menu, rearranging 22 messaging e-mail 67 multimedia messages 67 text messages 67 modes camera 13 fold closed 12 fold open 11 imaging 12 movies, muvees custom muvees 60 quick muvees 60 multimedia messages 67 mute sound 59 N Nokia original enhancements 126 P packet data connections 102 GPRS, glossary explanation 108 settings 110 pasting text 66 PC connections via Bluetooth or USB cable 101 PC Suite calendar data 80 synchronisation 101 transferring images to a PC 54 transferring media files 18 transferring music files to your memory card 58 viewing phone memory data 17 personalisation 24 phonebook See contact cards PIN code 112 profiles 22 R reminder See calendar, alarm remote mailbox 71 ringing tones personal ringing tone 39 receiving in a text message 70 RSMMC, reduced-size MMC see the Quick Start Guide S scenes image scenes 45 video scenes 45
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 138 security code See lock code sending contact cards, business cards 38 images 43 video clips 54 service commands 63 settings access codes 111 access points 109 Bluetooth connection 99 calendar 80 call barring 114 call diverting 114 certificates 112 configuring 14 cover display 116 data connections 108 date and time 111 display 107 headset 115 IM 92 , 96 language 106 lock code 112 loopset 115 original settings 106 personalising the device 21 PIN code 112 screen saver 107 UPIN code 112 UPUK code 112 shortcuts imaging mode 42 Web connection 82 SIM card copying names and numbers to phone 38 messages 74 names and numbers 39 sis file 116 SMS centre, short message service centre 75 snooze 15 software transferring a file to your device 117 sound clips 54 sounds muting a ringing tone 32 recording sounds 90 speed dialling 27 standby mode 21 synchronisation 103 T text message service centre adding new 75 text messages 67 themes 24 time 15 transferring content from another device 23 U UPIN code 112 UPUK code 112 USB cable 101 USIM card see glossary explanation in the Quick Start Guide USSD commands 63 V video call 28 answering 33 rejecting 33 video clips 54 video player See RealOne Player voice commands 116 voice dialling 27
Copyright é 2005 Nokia. All rights reserved. 139 voice mailbox 26 changing the phone number 26 diverting calls to voice mailbox 114 voice messages 26 voice tags 116 making calls 28 volume control 16 during a call 26 , 29 loudspeaker 16 W Web access points, see access points browser 82 browser 74